installation manual - ecosist information target group for this manual solar log1000/500/200...
TRANSCRIPT
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 1 of 374
Installation manual
Table of Contents
2 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Table of Contents
1 Safety information ............................................................................................................. 7
1.1 Target group for this manual ............................................................................................... 7
1.2 Hazard Classes ................................................................................................................... 7
1.3 Electric current .................................................................................................................... 8
2 Assembly instructions ...................................................................................................... 9
2.1 Package contents ................................................................................................................ 9
2.2 Wall mounted .................................................................................................................... 10
3 Unit connections ............................................................................................................. 12
3.1 Solar Log200, 500
.................................................................................................................. 12
3.2 Solar Log1000
...................................................................................................................... 13
3.3 RS485/422 B connection assignments (6 pin)................................................................... 15
3.4 RJ45 Configuration ............................................................................................................ 15
3.5 RJ11 Configuration ............................................................................................................ 16
3.6 Connection accessories .................................................................................................... 17
4 Connecting the inverters ................................................................................................ 18
4.1 Disconnecting the inverter and the Solar Log™ from power ............................................. 19
4.2 SMA .................................................................................................................................. 20
4.2.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................... 20
4.2.2 SMA connection using special RS485 piggyback card ...................................................... 21
4.2.3 Connect SMA with original SMA RS485 piggy back and the SMA-RS485 data module ... 24
4.2.4 SMA Bluetooth Operation .................................................................................................. 26
4.2.5 SMA Meter Connection Box .............................................................................................. 28
4.2.6 SMA Speedwire ................................................................................................................. 29
4.3 Kaco – Powador ................................................................................................................ 32
4.4 Kaco – PVI Blue Planet ..................................................................................................... 34
4.5 SolarMax – S, C and MT series......................................................................................... 35
4.6 SolarMax – Cx series ........................................................................................................ 37
4.7 SolarMax – E series .......................................................................................................... 39
4.8 Fronius with ComCard ....................................................................................................... 41
4.9 Fronius RL ......................................................................................................................... 43
4.10 Danfoss ............................................................................................................................. 45
4.11 Mitsubishi with RS485 interface ........................................................................................ 47
4.12 Power-One/Aurora ............................................................................................................ 49
4.13 Sunways – AT/NT/PT ........................................................................................................ 51
4.14 Vaillant – auroPOWER VPI /1 and VPI (RS485) ............................................................... 52
4.15 Solutronic SP25-55 (RS485) ............................................................................................. 54
4.16 Solutronic SP100, SP120 (RS485) .................................................................................... 56
4.17 Schüco SGI series (RS485) .............................................................................................. 57
4.18 REFUSOL ......................................................................................................................... 60
4.19 Kostal Pico and Solar factory Convert T inverter (RS485) ................................................ 64
4.20 Mastervolt (RS485) ........................................................................................................... 66
4.21 AEG PS ............................................................................................................................. 68
4.22 Eaton ................................................................................................................................. 70
4.23 Sunville .............................................................................................................................. 72
4.24 Riello ................................................................................................................................. 74
4.25 Diehl AKO with RS485 interface ........................................................................................ 76
4.26 Diehl H series .................................................................................................................... 78
4.27 Ingeteam ........................................................................................................................... 79
4.28 Voltwerk (only for Solar Log1000
) ........................................................................................ 81
4.29 Conergy (only Solar-Log1000
) ............................................................................................. 82
Table of Contents
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 3 of 374
4.30 Suntechnics (only Solar Log1000
) ........................................................................................ 84
4.31 Effekta ................................................................................................................................ 85
4.32 ALPHA-SOL ....................................................................................................................... 87
4.33 Europa-Solar AG ............................................................................................................... 89
4.34 Ever-Solar .......................................................................................................................... 91
4.35 Evoco ................................................................................................................................. 93
4.36 Powercom .......................................................................................................................... 94
4.37 SALICRU EQX ................................................................................................................... 97
4.38 SALICRU EQXLV .............................................................................................................. 99
4.39 Santerno .......................................................................................................................... 100
4.40 Schneider Electric SunEzy ............................................................................................... 102
4.41 Steca................................................................................................................................ 104
4.42 Steca ≥ 17 kW ................................................................................................................. 106
4.43 WINAICO ......................................................................................................................... 108
4.44 Delta (RS485) .................................................................................................................. 111
4.45 Sungrow ........................................................................................................................... 112
4.46 Sustainable Energy .......................................................................................................... 115
4.47 Motech (RS485) ............................................................................................................... 116
4.48 Zentral Solar Deutschland ZSD (RS485) ......................................................................... 118
4.49 AROS Solar Technology .................................................................................................. 119
4.50 General Electric inverters (GE) ........................................................................................ 121
4.51 Hyundai HPC-050HT-E and HPC-100HT-E ..................................................................... 122
4.52 Hyundai HPC-250HT-E.................................................................................................... 123
4.53 EKO Energy ..................................................................................................................... 125
4.54 Q3 (RS485) ...................................................................................................................... 126
4.55 Siemens ........................................................................................................................... 127
4.56 Albatech APL Trifase 15 / 20 ........................................................................................... 130
4.57 Albatech APL Monofase .................................................................................................. 133
4.58 Enfinity ............................................................................................................................. 134
4.59 Carlo Gavazzi .................................................................................................................. 136
4.60 Omron .............................................................................................................................. 137
4.61 Samil Power ..................................................................................................................... 139
4.62 Aten ................................................................................................................................. 140
4.63 Pairan .............................................................................................................................. 142
4.64 Schneider Electric Xantrex GT30E .................................................................................. 143
4.65 Schneider Electric Conext TL15000E and Conext TL20000E ......................................... 144
4.66 Eaton ............................................................................................................................... 145
4.67 Ginlong ............................................................................................................................ 147
4.68 Growatt ............................................................................................................................ 149
4.69 Oelmaier .......................................................................................................................... 151
4.70 AEG Protect ..................................................................................................................... 153
4.71 Helios Systems ................................................................................................................ 154
4.72 4.68 PV Powered – central inverter RS485 ..................................................................... 156
4.73 PV Powered string inverter .............................................................................................. 158
4.74 Valenia ............................................................................................................................. 159
4.75 Chint Power (CSP SC and CSP SCE to 20k) .................................................................. 161
4.76 Chint Power (CPS 20k+) .................................................................................................. 163
4.77 Chint Power Modbus........................................................................................................ 164
4.78 KLNE (Solartec and Sunteams) ....................................................................................... 166
4.79 ABB.................................................................................................................................. 167
4.75 ABB-Central Inverter ........................................................................................................ 170
4.76 Riverberi (EDI Series) ...................................................................................................... 171
4.77 GESOLAR ....................................................................................................................... 172
4.78 Trannergy ........................................................................................................................ 174
4.79 ZSD GmbH - zentralpower ............................................................................................... 176
4.80 Solar Edge ....................................................................................................................... 177
Table of Contents
4 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
4.81 Eltek ................................................................................................................................ 179
4.82 GMDE ............................................................................................................................. 181
4.83 GoodWe .......................................................................................................................... 183
4.84 CyberPower..................................................................................................................... 186
4.85 Yaskawa .......................................................................................................................... 187
4.86 G-Tec .............................................................................................................................. 189
4.87 Huawei ............................................................................................................................ 191
4.88 Solectria .......................................................................................................................... 192
5 Connecting accessories ............................................................................................... 195
5.1 Analog modem package (Solar Log1000
) .......................................................................... 195
5.2 Mobile phone package (Solar Log1000
) ............................................................................ 196
5.3 Sensor Box ...................................................................................................................... 197
5.3.1 Technical description ....................................................................................................... 197
5.4 Sensor basic.................................................................................................................... 199
5.5 Ripple-control receiver (only Solar Log™ PM+) .............................................................. 201
6 Other connections ......................................................................................................... 203
6.1 Large display (Solar Log500
, Solar Log1000
) ...................................................................... 203
6.2 Relay (only for Solar Log1000
) .......................................................................................... 204
6.3 External power meter ...................................................................................................... 205
6.4 Connection of alarm contact (Solar Log1000
) .................................................................... 208
7 Setting Up (Commissioning) ........................................................................................ 210
7.1 Connecting Solar Log™ to a network / PC ...................................................................... 210
7.2 Initial setting up (commissioning) of Solar Log200
............................................................ 212
7.3 Initial setting up (commissioning) of Solar Log500
............................................................ 215
7.4 Initial setting up (commissioning) of Solar Log1000
........................................................... 216
7.5 LED display with Easy Installation ................................................................................... 217
7.6 Starting Easy Installation retroactively ............................................................................. 218
7.7 LED status display ........................................................................................................... 219
8 Configuration at a PC .................................................................................................... 220
8.1 Starting configuration ...................................................................................................... 220
8.2 Overview of "Configuration" menu navigation ................................................................. 221
8.3 Configuring network settings (Basis / Lan) ...................................................................... 222
8.4 Solar Log™ WiFi: WLAN configuration (Basic/WLAN) .................................................... 227
8.5 Solar Log1000
: Defining system groups (Basic / Plant Groups) ........................................ 229
8.6 Solar Log1000, 500
: Setting the inverter order (Basic / Inverter Order) ................................ 231
8.7 Solar Log1000, 500
: Re-detection after an inverter replacement (Basic /Inverter exchange) 233
8.8 Exchanging SMA inverters .............................................................................................. 235
8.9 Solar Log1000, 500, 200
: Configuring the inverter data (Basic / Inverter) ............................... 236
8.10 Defining forecast data for the solar plant (Basic / Forecast) ............................................ 244
8.11 Configuring the data display graph (Basic/Graphics) ...................................................... 245
8.12 Plant information for the homepage and banners (Extended / Internet) .......................... 247
8.13 Configuring automatic data export (Extended / WEB export) ......................................... 249
8.14 Configuring e-mail messages (Extended / E-mail) .......................................................... 251
8.15 Configuring text messages (SMS) (Extended / SMS) ...................................................... 254
8.16 Setting fault messages (Extended / Malfunction) ........................................................... 256
8.17 Feed-in management for Solar Log™ PM+ (Extended / Feed-in Management) ............. 257
8.17.1 Activating password protection ........................................................................................ 259
8.17.2 Setting up active power reduction ................................................................................... 260
8.17.3 "Deactivated" menu item ................................................................................................. 261
8.17.4 "Remote controlled" menu item (only Solar LogTM
PM+ models) .................................... 261
8.17.5 "70 percent fixed regulation" menu item .......................................................................... 264
8.17.6 "70 percent fixed regulation including consumption of self-produced power" menu item 265
Table of Contents
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 5 of 374
8.17.7 Menu Item Fixed Regulation with Current Consumption Withholding of X Percent ......... 266
8.17.8 Setting up reactive power control ..................................................................................... 267
8.17.9 "Deactivated" menu item .................................................................................................. 268
8.17.10 "Fixed value cos (Phi) shift factor" menu item .................................................................. 268
8.17.11 "Fixed reactive power in Var" menu item ......................................................................... 269
8.17.12 "Variable reactive power over characteristic curve Q(U)" menu item(only Solar Log1000
PM+) 274
8.17.13 Installing the Solar-Log™ Utility Meter (Janitza UMG 104) .............................................. 275
8.17.14 "Controllable shift factor cos (Phi)" menu item (only Solar-Log™ PM+) .......................... 281
8.17.15 Networking (only Solar Log1000
PM+) ............................................................................... 283
8.17.16 Diagnostic options for power management ...................................................................... 285
8.18 Setting automatic/manual data backups (Internal/Backup) ............................................. 286
8.19 Manual data corrections ................................................................................................... 288
8.20 Managing system settings (Internal / System) ................................................................ 290
8.21 Updating the firmware (Internal / Update) ....................................................................... 293
9 Solar Log500
: Configuration at the unit ......................................................................... 295
9.1 Working with the keypad and display ............................................................................... 295
9.2 Navigation overview ......................................................................................................... 296
9.3 Configuring system settings ("System" menu) ................................................................. 297
9.3.1 Setting the display language (System / Language) .......................................................... 297
9.3.2 Setting the date, time and currency format (System / Country) ....................................... 297
9.3.3 Adjusting the Date/Time (System / Date/Time) ................................................................ 297
9.3.4 Configuring a large display (System / Large display) ....................................................... 298
9.4 Configuring network settings ("Network" menu) ............................................................... 299
9.4.1 Obtain an IP address automatically (Network / Automatic) .............................................. 299
9.4.2 Setting an IP address manually (Network / Manual) ........................................................ 299
9.5 Configuring the inverter data ("Inverter" menu) ................................................................ 300
9.5.1 Inverter selection for Bluetooth (Inverter / Bluetooth) ....................................................... 300
9.5.2 Inverter selection on RS485/422 B interface (Inverter / RS485/422) ............................... 300
9.5.3 Configuring the power meter on the S0 input (Inverter / S0 meter) .................................. 301
9.5.4 Perform inverter detection (Inverter / Detection) .............................................................. 302
9.6 Configuring the Internet data ("Internet" menu) ............................................................... 303
9.6.1 Setting automatic data exports (Internet / Data export).................................................... 303
9.6.2 Setting the Internet gateway (Internet / Solar Log WEB) ................................................. 303
9.6.3 Server definition (Internet / Server) .................................................................................. 303
9.6.4 Entering a user name (Internet / User)............................................................................. 303
9.6.5 Setting a password (Internet / Password) ........................................................................ 304
9.6.6 Intervals for transferring data to the homepage (Internet / Interval) ................................. 304
9.6.7 Test transmission (Internet / Connection test) ................................................................. 304
9.7 Internal settings, deleting and PIN lock functions ("Internal" menu) ................................. 305
9.7.1 Reset (Internal / Reset) .................................................................................................... 305
9.7.2 PIN lock (Internal / PIN lock) ............................................................................................ 305
10 Solar Log1000
: Configuration at the unit ....................................................................... 306
10.1 Working with the touchscreen .......................................................................................... 306
10.1.1 Main menu – Configuration menu .................................................................................... 306
10.1.2 Control elements in the configuration dialog boxes ......................................................... 307
10.2 Overview of configuration menu navigation "Config." ...................................................... 310
10.3 Performing the initial configuration (Config. / Start / Initial configuration) ......................... 311
10.3.1 Time settings and IP address .......................................................................................... 311
10.3.2 Inverter selection ............................................................................................................. 312
10.3.3 Power meter on S0 input ................................................................................................. 313
10.4 Performing inverter detection (Config. / Start / Inverter detection) ................................... 314
10.5 Changing the network settings (Basic / Network) ............................................................ 315
10.5.1 Changing the network access .......................................................................................... 315
Table of Contents
6 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
10.5.2 Changing the DHCP settings........................................................................................... 316
10.5.3 Settings for analog modem.............................................................................................. 318
10.5.4 Settings for GPRS modem .............................................................................................. 319
10.6 Solar Log1000
WiFi: WLAN configuration (Basic/WLAN) .................................................. 321
10.7 Defining plant groups (Basic / Plant Groups) .................................................................. 323
10.8 Configuring the inverter data (Basic / Inverter) ................................................................ 325
10.9 Defining forecast data for the solar plant (Basic / Forecast) ............................................ 335
10.10 Plant information for the homepage (Internet / Basic settings) ........................................ 337
10.11 Configuring e-mail and text messages (SMS) (Internet / Email / SMS) ........................... 339
10.12 Setting up automatic data exports (Internet / WEB) ........................................................ 343
10.13 Configuring plant monitoring (Extended / Plant monitoring) ............................................ 344
10.14 Configuring the connection to the large display (Extended / Large display) .................... 345
10.15 Configuring alarm messages and signals for the alarm contact (Extended / Alarm contact)347
10.16 RS485 wireless communications package: Testing the connection (Extended / RS485
wireless package) .......................................................................................................................... 348
10.17 External switches - smart metering (Extended / External switches) ................................ 349
10.18 Making data corrections (Internal / Data correction) ........................................................ 350
10.19 Configuring the system internal settings (Internal / System) ........................................... 351
10.20 Updating firmware automatically or manually (Internal / Firmware) ................................. 354
10.21 Selecting a display language (System / Language settings) ........................................... 355
10.22 Country settings (Internal / Country setting) .................................................................... 356
11 Faults .............................................................................................................................. 357
11.1 Fault indications on the device LEDs .............................................................................. 357
11.2 Fault messages ............................................................................................................... 358
11.3 Inverter fault messages ................................................................................................... 362
11.4 Restarting and resetting .................................................................................................. 363
12 Disposal ......................................................................................................................... 365
13 Technical Data ............................................................................................................... 366
Appendix ...................................................................................................................................... 368
Internet ports ................................................................................................................................. 368
SMA mixed wiring .......................................................................................................................... 368
Interconnection of Kaco Powador inverters ................................................................................... 369
Homepage Service ........................................................................................................................ 370
List of figures ............................................................................................................................... 372
Safety information
Target group for this manual
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 7 of 374
1 Safety information
In order to protect people, the product itself, and other equipment, please pay
attention to the following before handling the product:
the content of this manual,
particularly the safety information,
the warning signs and type plates attached to the product.
1.1 Target group for this manual
This manual is intended for solar energy technicians and qualified electricians
who are installing a Solar Log200
, Solar Log500
or Solar Log1000
, wiring them up
to inverters, configuring them to operate in particular systems, and putting
them into operation.
All the actions described in this manual for wiring and working on inverters
must be carried out only by specially trained electricians. All repairs should
only be carried out by similarly trained personnel, or by the manufacturers
themselves.
1.2 Hazard Classes
The safety instructions in this document are represented with standard signs
and symbols. Two classes of risk are identified, depending on their probability
of occurrence and the seriousness of their consequences.
DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation to life
Non compliance with this warning can lead to severe and irreversible injuries or death
Caution
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation to people, or a risk of material damage
Non compliance with this warning can lead to irreversible injuries or to material
damage
Safety information
Electric current
8 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
1.3 Electric current
DANGER
Risk of death by electric shock if inverters are opened.
Never open the inverter housing when the inverter is connected to
power.
Switch inverters off Page 19.
Always read the installation and safety instructions given in the
manual for the corresponding inverter.
DANGER
Danger of death if there is condensation in the power supply unit when
started!
Condensation can occur if the power supply unit is moved directly from a cold
environment to a warm environment.
Wait until the temperatures have equalized before doing this.
Damage to the electrical components in inverters and on interface cards due
to electrostatic discharge.
Avoid contact with component connections and plug contacts.
Before picking up the component, ground yourself by holding the PE
or the unpainted part of the inverter housing.
Caution
Damage to the electronic components of the Solar Log™ when wiring the
Solar Log™!
Switch the Solar Log™; Page 19.
Caution
Risk of electric shock. Do not use the unit if the housing of the
external power supply unit is damaged. A damaged power supply unit
must be replaced by one of the same type and from the same
manufacturer in order to avoid danger.
Caution
The Solar LogTM
may only be used in closed rooms.
Assembly instructions
Package contents
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 9 of 374
2 Assembly instructions
2.1 Package contents
Check the package contents before proceeding to assembly and
installation. Report any damage or missing parts to the forwarding
agent immediately.
The unit is supplied with the following components:
Solar Log™ basic unit
2x cover panels to be fitted to the top and bottom of the unit to
protect the connections and reset button
Plug-in 12 V power supply unit
Terminal block connector for all connections; Page 17
4x wall plugs and screws for wall mounting
User manual on CD in PDF format
Assembly instructions
Wall mounted
10 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
2.2 Wall mounted
The unit is produced according to protection class IP20 and is intended
only for installation in interior areas that are dry and dust-free.
Suitable wall plugs and screws are supplied for wall mounting.
Please remember that there must be a plug and a mains socket
available near the Solar LogTM
.
Figure 1: Solar Log™ wall mounting
1 Put the housing where it is to be fitted and mark the drill holes.
The Solar LogTM
should be fitted in an easily accessible place.
2 Drill the holes and insert the wall plugs
Note Solar Log
1000 GPRS:
The SIM card should be inserted ( Page 14) before attaching the unit, as the
insertion slot will no longer be accessible after wall mounting.
1 2
3
4
5
6
Assembly instructions
Wall mounted
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 11 of 374
3 Fasten the housing with the screws
4 Using a file or a saw, clear the cable feed holes – on top and/or
bottom cover – by sawing or filing along the grooves.
(Top and bottom covers are identical.)
5 Plug all cable connectors to their connections
6 Attach the covers
Unit connections
Solar Log200, 500
12 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
3 Unit connections
3.1 Solar Log200, 500
Bottom connections
Figure 2: Connections to the bottom side of Solar Log200, 500
Label Function
RS485/422 B RS485 interface, 6 pin:
Connection to inverter, Sensor Box or
Connection to large display (Solar Log500
).
Assignment: Page 15.
Power 12 V 12 Volt DC voltage input (24 V DC max.)
Network Ethernet network interface, 10/100 Mbit
Top connection (Solar Log500)
Figure 3: S0 connection on the top of theSolar Log500
Label Function
S0 In/Out S0 pulse input for connection to an external power meter.
S0 pulse output for connection to an external large display.
Please note the connection characteristics of the SO
connection Page 366.
Unit connections
Solar Log1000
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 13 of 374
3.2 Solar Log1000
Bottom connections
Figure 4: Bottom Connections Solar Log1000
Label Function
Rel. Relay, for connecting external signals (max. 24V), 3 pin,
e.g. to connect rotating beacons etc.
RS485 A RS485 interface, 4 pin:
Connection to an inverter, Sensor Box or large display
(inactive if the optional Bluetooth interface is used)
RS485/422 B
RS485 interface, 6 pin:
Connection to inverter, Sensor Box or
connection to large display.
Assignment: Page 15.
Power 12 V 12 Volt DC voltage input (24 V DC max.)
Network Ethernet network interface, 10/100 Mbit
RS232 RS232 modem interface. Connection to GPRS modem
Top connections
Figure 5: Connections to the top of the Solar Log1000
Label Function
S0 In/Out S0 pulse input for connection to an external power meter.
S0 pulse output for connecting to a large external screen.
Please note the connection characteristics of the S0
connectionTechnical data
Alarm Connection for contact strip for anti-theft protection.
Transmission up to 5 km using optical cables
CAN CAN bus, connection to a Voltwerk, Conergy or
Suntechnics inverter.
USB USB host connection. Suitable for USB sticks
(Not suitable for connection to a PC!)
Unit connections
Solar Log1000
14 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Insertion slot for SIM card and antenna connection (Solar
Log1000 GPRS)
In addition to the connections on the Standard Solar Log1000
,
the Solar Log1000
GPRS model with integrated GPRS modem has an
insertion slot for the SIM card and a screw connection for a mobile
communications antenna.
1 Insert the SIM card in the slot on the rear right, inside the Solar
Log1000
GPRS.
Figure 6: Insertion slot for SIM card inside on the right (Solar Log1000
GPRS)
2 Screw the external antenna into the antenna connection on the
bottom of the unit.
Find a suitable position with good reception quality for the magnetic
base antenna. If necessary, check the reception first with a mobile
phone.
Figure 7: Antenna connection on the top of the unit (Solar Log1000
PM+ GPRS)
Unit connections
RS485/422 B connection assignments (6 pin)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 15 of 374
3.3 RS485/422 B connection assignments (6 pin)
The RS485/422 inverter B connection on the Solar Log™ is pre-set for
use with a Fronius/Eaton inverter, and is assigned as follows:
PIN RS485 A RS485/422 B RS422 (for Fronius/Eaton)
1 Data+ Data+ T/RX+
2 12 V 12 V 12V
3 Ground Ground Ground
4 Data- Data- T/RX-
5 R/TX+
6 R/TX-
The connection labels Data+/Data– are specific to the manufacturer
and may also be labeled A/B, or similar.
Green 6-pin terminal block connectors are supplied for connecting the
first inverter to the RS485/422 B interface of the Solar Log™.
3.4 RJ45 Configuration
Some inverter manufacturers use RJ45 jacks on their units.
RJ45 plug pin assignments
Caution
Risk of damage to the unit!
Unit connections
RJ11 Configuration
16 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
The Solar Log™ also has an RJ45 socket, which must never be connected to
the RJ45 socket on the inverter!
Only connect the inverter using the RS485/422 B interface of the
Solar Log™ or on the Solar-Log1000
also via the RS485 A
interface.
Connect the RS485/422 B and/or the RS485 interface of the Solar
Log™ in accordance with the description on the relevant inverter.
3.5 RJ11 Configuration
Some inverter manufacturers use RJ11 jacks on their units.
RJ11 plug pin assignments
Caution
Risk of damage to the unit!
The Solar Log™ also has an RJ45 socket, which must never be connected to
the RJ11 socket on the inverter!
Only connect the inverter using the RS485/422 B interface of the
Solar Log™ or on the Solar Log1000
also via the RS485 A
interface.
Unit connections
Connection accessories
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 17 of 374
3.6 Connection accessories
Terminal block connectors, 6 pin
Two green 6 pin terminal block connectors for connection to
RS485/422 B
The terminals on the terminal block connectors supplied are numbered
serially from left to right.
Figure 8: 6 pin terminal block connector – for connecting the first inverter
Terminal block connector, 3-pin and 4-pin (only for the Solar
Log1000)
Other terminal block connectors are also supplied for the Solar-Log1000
:
2x green 3-pin terminal block connectors for connection to Rel.
or CAN
1x 4-pin terminal block connector for connection to RS485-A or
RS485/422 B. If connected to a RS485/422 B connection, the
terminal block should be aligned to the left!
Figure 9: Additional terminal block connectors (Solar Log1000
)
Connecting cables
The following connecting cables, which may be needed for various
purposes, are not included in the package content.
To connect a router, you need a network cable with the
appropriate length. If you want to connect the Solar-Log™
directly to your PC or laptop, you need to use a crossover cable.
Cable for connecting the Solar Log™ to an inverter.
Sets of prefabricated cables are available as accessories
suitable for the inverter concerned. The length of these cable
sets is 3 m.
If you want to connect other inverters to the Solar Log500
and
Solar Log1000
, you need suitable cables and connectors to
connect the inverters to each other.
For each connection to the Solar-Log™ (RS485A and
RS485/422B) a separate cable must be used.
Connecting the inverters
Connection accessories
18 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
When wiring with CAT cables, the twisted pair of wires should be
used.
4 Connecting the inverters
As each inverter manufacture uses different wiring connections and
connectors, the corresponding data cables must be adapted correctly.
You will find the terminal strip block wiring diagram to connect
the inverters in table form in the following sections on connecting
inverters.
For assignment of the RS485/422 B connection to the
Solar Log™, see Page15.
Note
Solare Datensysteme GmbH supplies suitable connection cables for most
inverter manufacturers.
Always read the manufacturer-specific instructions for connecting the
data cable. You will find these instructions in the manufacturer's
documentation.
However, when assigning the inverter wiring on the Solar Log™
(RS485/422 B connection), follow the instructions in this manual,
otherwise the inverters will not be detected by Solar Log™.
DANGER
Risk of death by electric shock if inverters are opened.
Never open the inverter housing when the inverter is connected to
power.
Switch inverters off Page 19.
Always read the installation and safety instructions given in the
manual for the corresponding inverter.
Any work on inverters must only be carried out by trained electricians.
Caution
Damage to the electrical components in inverters and on interface cards due
to electrostatic discharge.
Avoid contact with component connections and plug contacts.
Before picking up the component, ground yourself by holding the PE
or the unpainted part of the inverter housing.
Caution
Damage to the electronic components of the Solar Log™ when wiring the
Solar Log™!
Switch the Solar Log™; Page 19
Connecting the inverters
Disconnecting the inverter and the Solar Log™ from power
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 19 of 374
4.1 Disconnecting the inverter and the Solar Log™ from power
Switching inverters off
Before a making a cable connection between the Solar Log™ and the
connections inside the inverter and before installing an interface card in
the inverter, always turn off all of the inverters first.
To do this, read the manufacturer's documentation for the inverter, and
proceed as follows:
1 Disconnect the AC side,
2 Disconnect the DC side,
3 Wait at least 5 minutes until the condensers in the inverters have
discharged.
Switching the Solar Log™ off
Remove the power plug from the socket or the "Power 12 V" jack on
the Solar Log™.
Connecting the inverters
SMA
20 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
4.2 SMA
4.2.1 Overview
SMA inverters do not have an integrated RS485 interface.
However, the following RS485 interfaces can be retrofitted
to SMA inverters:
Special RS485 piggyback card (by Solare Datensysteme GmbH)
Original SMA RS485 piggyback card (by SMA)
Both piggyback cards can be installed in "Sunny Boy" inverters (except
for 3000/4000/5000TL-20 next generation) or "Sunny Mini Central" by
SMA. The SMA RS485 data module is required for the SMA -20 and
Tripower inverters.
Special RS485 piggyback card
Only to be used with Solar Log™ devices.
Piggyback mixed mode
Inverters with special RS485 piggybacks and original SMA piggybacks
or data modules can be used together.
A diagram for wiring in SMA combined mode can be found in the
appendix; Page 368.
SMA Bluetooth mode
The Solar Log™ BT model is compatible with Bluetooth enabled SMA
inverters. The Solar Log500
BT and Solar Log1000
BT models allow mixed
mode operation (Bluetooth with RS485). Up to 7 SMA inverters can be
connected.
Note
For exchanging SMA invertres read Page 235 .
Connecting the inverters
SMA
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 21 of 374
4.2.2 SMA connection using special RS485 piggyback card
Overview
Interface not integrated; retrofit the special RS485 piggyback
card
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter on the
piggyback
Communication address does not have to be assigned.
4 pin wiring
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Install the special RS485 piggyback in inverter
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
Installing the special RS485 piggyback in inverters
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Insert the piggyback card on the inverter's control board with the
lower terminal strip aligned to the left (Figure 10, left).
The word "bottom" printed on the control board must be visible on
the bottom left (Figure 10, right).
Figure 10: Control board before and after installation of the piggyback
Connecting the inverters
SMA
22 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
– ready-made data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
– self-made, shielded 4 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
Procedure
1 Pull the free wires through the wire opening in the inverter.
2 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter terminal strip
Terminal Terminal
1 2
2 3
3 5
4 7
3 Pull the wire in the inverter through the insulation sleeve attached to
the piggy back.
The wire must be enclosed in the insulating hose inside the inverter.
4 Ground the connection Connect terminal 5 on the inverter to the
inverter housing using the supplied flat strip connector.
5 If only one inverter is to be connected it must be terminated.
Put the supplied jumper onto the lower pins on the connector strip.
Figure 11: Piggyback - insert jumper
6 Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
7 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters
SMA
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 23 of 374
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a 4 wire, shielded data cable (e.g. a 25 m ring
cable, Solare Datensysteme order no. 220014)
Where to connect: Terminal block in inverter (on the retrofitted
RS485 interface)
Procedure
1 Pull the wire in the inverter through the insulation tube that is
attached to the piggy back.
The wire must be encased in the insulation tube inside all inverters.
2 Connect all 4 contacts (2, 3, 5, 7) on the terminal strip of inverter 1 to
inverter 2.
Note
A diagram for wiring in SMA combined mode can be found in the appendix;
Page 368.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter.
Put the supplied jumper onto the lower pins on the connector strip.
5 Close inverters.
Connecting the inverters
SMA
24 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
4.2.3 Connect SMA with original SMA RS485 piggy back and the SMA-RS485
data module
Overview
Interface not integrated; retrofit the SMA RS485 piggyback card
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter on the
piggyback
Communication address does not have to be assigned.
3 pin wiring
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Installing the original SMA RS485 piggyback in the inverter
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
Installing the original SMA RS485 piggyback in the inverter
Procedure
Install the original SMA RS485 piggy back in the inverter in
accordance with the interface card installation instructions.
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made, shielded 3 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Pull the free wires through the wire opening in the inverter.
3 Pull the cable through the insulation tube.
Note
The wire must be enclosed in the insulating hose inside the inverter.
4 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter terminal strip
Terminal Terminal
1 2
3 5
4 7
Connecting the inverters
SMA
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 25 of 374
5 Ground the connection Connect terminal 5 on the inverter to the
inverter housing using the supplied flat strip connector.
6 If only one inverter is to be connected it must be terminated.
Put the supplied jumper onto the lower pins on the connector strip:
7 Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected
8 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar-Log500, Solar-Log1000)
Connect using a 3 wire, shielded data cable.
Where to connect: Terminal block in inverter (on the retrofitted
RS485 interface)
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Connect the inverter in accordance with the inverter installation
instructions.
3 If only one inverter is to be connected it must be terminated.
Put the supplied jumper onto the lower pins on the connector strip:
4 Close inverters.
Note
A diagram for wiring in SMA combined mode can be found in the appendix;
Page 368.
Connecting the inverters
SMA
26 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
4.2.4 SMA Bluetooth Operation
Bluetooth operation is only possible when an optional Bluetooth module
is installed inside the Solar-Log™.
Bluetooth operation is only possible with the Solar-Log™
BT models. All
SMA Bluetooth inverters are supported, also Bluetooth Piggy Backs.
Overview
All SMA Bluetooth Piggy Backs are supported
Parallel operation with SMA-SunnyBeam-Bluetooth is not
possible.
Solar-Log1000
and Solar-Log500
:
Maximum of 7 SMA Bluetooth inverters can be logged
Connection of further inverter manufacturers is possible.
Bluetooth settings on the Solar-Log™
The Solar-Log™ supports both the "Direct Connection" as well
as the "Mesh Connection" modes.
For the models of the series R2 only "networked connection" are
available.
Direct Connection: The Solar-Log™ establishes a direct
connection to each individual inverter. This requires that all
inverters be within range of the Solar-Log™. The NET-ID needs
to be set both on the inverter as well as on the Solar-Log™ to
the value 1.
Mesh Connection (Recommended): the Solar-Log™
establishes connection with an inverter that transfers the signal
farther. The range of the Bluetooth can be hereby increased. To
use this mode, select at least the NET-ID 2 both on the inverter
as well as on the Solar-Log™. The NET-ID must be the same on
both the Solar-Log™ as well as on the inverter.
Bluetooth addressing on the inverter
Setting: By way of rotary switch on the inverter
For more detailed information, please consult the inverter user
manual.
Bluetooth detection
Perform the initial Bluetooth detection within the same room
where the inverter is mounted to eliminate the possibility of
being out of range
Afterward, test the Bluetooth connection from a broader distance. The range of
the Bluetooth is a maximum of 50 m in an open field.
Note
The preset user name and password in the inverter cannot be modified.
Connecting the inverters
SMA
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 27 of 374
Otherwise inverter detection and communication with the inverter are not
possible.
Connecting the inverters
SMA
28 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
4.2.5 SMA Meter Connection Box
An energy meter with S0 output can be connected to the SMA Meter
Connection Box. The Meter Connection Box then converts the S0 signal to the
RS485 Bus.
The Meter Connection Box is connected to the RS485 socket the same way as
with the SMA inverter (Page 24). In the course of the inverter detection, the
Box is recognized as an inverter - SMA is to be selected.
The configuration is done in the Configuration // Basis // Inverter menu.
Configuration of the SMA Meter Connection Box
Procedure
Perform detection
Select the respective number
Enter the generator power
Enter the pulse factor
Select the type of power meter
Save
Connecting the inverters
SMA
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 29 of 374
4.2.6 SMA Speedwire
Overview
The Speedwire interface can be already integrated or retrofitted
The IP address of the inverter must be assigned
Connected using network cable (patch cable) and Ethernet
router or switch
Working procedure:
• Set IP addresses fix on the inverters
• Shut down both inverters and Solar Log™ completely;
Page 19
• Connect the 1st inverter to the Solar-Log™ (RJ45)
• Connect the inverter among themselves (RJ45)
Retrofitting the inverters with the SMA-Speedwire retrofit
module
Procedure
Install the Speedwire module into the inverter according to the
installation instruction of the interface card
Connect the inverter to the Solar-Log™ by cable
The connection is made with a
network cable (patch cable) and the
Ethernet router or switch.
Procedure
1 Open up the inverter housing as instructed by the inverter manual
2 Pull the LAN cable through the respective cable aperture of the
inverter and connect the cable to the Speedwire interface card
3 Close the housing of the inverter if no further inverters are to be
connected
4 Plug the LAN cable into the RJ45 (Ethernet) plug of the Solar-Log™
Connect the inverters among themselves by cable
(Solar-Log500, Solar-Log1000)
The inverters are connected to each other via the RJ45 interface or
eventually a router/switch.
The explanations in the inverter manual are to be followed closely in
making the connections.
Connecting the inverters
SMA
30 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Assigning the IP addresses
A static or fix IP address must be assigned to the inverter. The
default setting is usual set to automatic assignment. Consult the
inverter user manual for more detailed information.
Please choose an IP address from the same sub-network as the
Solar-Log™
Example: the Solar-Log™ has IP 192.168.178.49
The inverter must have in this case an IP address from the
sector 192.168.178.xxx (xxx stands for a number between 2 –
254)
Procedure: According to the inverter user manual
Detection
To make the detection with the Solar-Log200 choose the
inverter manufacturer "SMA" under the item "Inverters at
Network (Ethernet)" to be found in the menu selection
"Configuration // Start // Start config." and confirm the selection
with "Save”.
Detection by the Solar-Log200
Connecting the inverters
SMA
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 31 of 374
The detection requires ca. 5 minutes and is completed by a re-
boot of the Solar-Log200. After the reboot, the inverter is
available and can be configured.
On the Solar-Log500/1000
the detection is started via the display.
To detect the Speedwire interface, select the manufacturer SMA
under the menu item "Network" and start the detectioon.
Power management
The power management and the reactive power management
has also been made available to you via the Speedwire
communications. Please note that this requires making settings
on the inverter by means of software from the inverter
manufacturer. Please refer to the inverter user manual for more
detailed information.
Notice
Please make special note of the instructions from the manufacturer’s
installation manual with regard to the configuration of the IP address.
Notice
The retrofit modules of the SMA Speedwire have 2 netzwork plugs that
connect to the bus..
On the integerated Speedwire interfaces, however, you will find only one plug
available for each inverter. Therefore, to install multiple inverters or to connect
to the Internet via the Ethernet (RJ45) interface of the Solar-Log™, a router or
a switch is required.
Connecting the inverters
Kaco – Powador
32 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
4.3 Kaco – Powador
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter
2 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication address
Note
Wiring instructions and diagram for Interconnection of Kaco Powador
inverters Interconnection of Kaco Powador inverters can be found in the
Appendix; Page 369.
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
partly made data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made, shielded 2 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Pull the free wires through the wire opening in the inverter.
3 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter terminal strip
Terminal Terminal
1 B
4 A
4 If only one inverter is to be connected it must be terminated.
Series 2 Powador: Set the DIP switch inside the inverter to ON
and all other inverters to OFF.
5 Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
6 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters
Kaco – Powador
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 33 of 374
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a 2 wire, shielded data cable.
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter
The RS485 connections on the terminal strip are each double
connections so that the wiring can be continued to the next inverter.
Procedure
1 Connect the data cable to the free terminals A and B of inverter 1.
2 Insert the other end of the cable into terminals A and B of inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter:
Series 2 Powador: Set the DIP switch inside the inverter to ON
and all other inverters to OFF.
5 Close inverters.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Setting: Using the inverter operating display.
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions.
Note
The 25000xi - 33000xi Kaco inverter models are shown as 3 independent
inverters in the Solar Log™. If, for example, such inverters are available, give
them addresses 1 and 2. In the Solar Log™ the inverters will be shown
internally as 1.1 / 1.2 - 2.1 / 2.2 etc.
Connecting the inverters
Kaco – PVI Blue Planet
34 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
4.4 Kaco – PVI Blue Planet
Overview
The Solar Log™ only works with Kaco Blue Planet inverters that
have an RS485 interface. The RS232 interface is not supported.
RS232 models: RS485 interface can be retrofitted by the
manufacturer.
RS485 models: Interface integrated
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter
2 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication address
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
partly fabricated data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made, shielded 2 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Pull the free wires through the wire opening in the inverter.
3 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter terminal strip
Terminal Terminal
1 B
4 A
4 If only one inverter is to be connected it must be terminated.
In the inverter connect the free terminal A to terminal B using the
supplied 330 Ω terminating resistor.
5 Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
6 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters
SolarMax – S, C and MT series
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 35 of 374
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a 2 wire, shielded data cable.
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter.
The RS485 connections on the terminal strip are each double
connections so that the wiring can be continued to the next inverter.
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Connect the data cable to the free terminals A and B of inverter 1.
3 Insert the other end of the cable into terminals A and B of inverter 2.
4 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
5 Terminate in the last inverter:
Connect the free terminal A to terminal B using the supplied 330 Ω
terminating resistor.
6 Close inverters.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Setting: Using the DIP switch inside the inverter.
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions.
4.5 SolarMax – S, C and MT series
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: RJ45 socket on the outside of the inverter
6 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication address
Connecting the inverters
SolarMax – S, C and MT series
36 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made RS485 data cable with RJ45 plug and terminal block
connector (Page 17).
Caution
Risk of damage to the unit!
The Solar Log™ also has an RJ45 socket, which must never be connected to
the RJ45 socket on the inverter!
Only connect the inverter using the RS485/422 B interface of the
Solar Log™ or on the Solar Log1000
also via the RS485 A
interface.
Procedure
1 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
RJ45 inverter
Terminal PIN
1 7
2 1
2 2
3 3
3 4
5 – not used -
6 – not used -
4 8
2 Insert the RJ45 plug into any RJ45 socket on the first inverter.
3 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using the RS485 data cable with an RJ45 plug.
Where to connect: RJ45 socket on the outside of the inverter.
Connecting the inverters
SolarMax – Cx series
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 37 of 374
Procedure
1 Insert the RJ45 plug into the free RJ45 socket on the first inverter.
2 Insert the other end of the wire into any RJ45 socket on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Setting: Using the inverter operating display.
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions.
Notes
The inverter's factory setting is communication address 255.
On the inverter operating display set the communication address
manually to 1 even if only one inverter is connected to the Solar
Log™.
S series:
When setting the communication address on the inverter display only
the RS485 interface must be activated (set at the factory), not the
Ethernet interface that is also installed in the inverter.
4.6 SolarMax – Cx series
Overview
Interface not integrated; Retrofit RS485 interface card.
6 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Install the RS485 interface in the inverter
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication address
Installing the RS485 interface
Procedure
Install the RS485 interface in the inverter in accordance with the
interface card installation instructions.
Connecting the inverters
SolarMax – Cx series
38 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made cable connection using RS485 data cable with RJ45
plug and terminal block connector (Page 17).
Caution
Risk of damage to the unit!
The Solar Log™ also has an RJ45 socket, which must never be connected to
the RJ45 socket on the inverter!
Only connect the inverter using the RS485/422 B interface of the
Solar-Log™ or on the Solar Log1000
also via the
RS485 A interface.
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram:
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
RJ45 inverter
Terminal PIN
1 7
2 1
2 2
3 3
3 4
5 – not used -
6 – not used -
4 8
3 Insert the RJ45 plug into any RJ45 socket on the first inverter.
4 Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected
5 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters
SolarMax – E series
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 39 of 374
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a network cable (patch cable)
Where to connect: RJ45 socket inside the inverter (on the
retrofitted RS485 interface)
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Insert the RJ45 plug into any RJ45 socket on the first inverter.
3 Insert the other end of the wire into any RJ45 socket on inverter 2.
4 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
5 Close inverters.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Setting: Using the inverter operating display.
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions.
4.7 SolarMax – E series
Overview
Interface not integrated; Retrofit RS485 interface card.
6 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Install the RS485 interface in the inverter
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication address
Installing the RS485 interface
Procedure
Install the RS485 interface in the inverter in accordance with the
interface card installation instructions.
Connecting the inverters
SolarMax – E series
40 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made cable connection using RS485 data cable, RJ45 plug
and terminal block connector (Page 17).
Caution
Risk of damage to the unit!
The Solar Log™ also has an RJ45 socket, which must never be connected to
the RJ45 socket on the inverter!
Only connect the inverter using the RS485/422 B interface of the
Solar Log™ or on the Solar Log1000
also via the RS485 A
interface.
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
RJ45 inverter
Terminal PIN
1 7
2 1
2 2
3 3
3 4
5 – not used -
6 – not used -
4 8
3 Run the wire from the Solar Log™ to inverter 1 through the hole for
the wire on the bottom of the unit.
4 In the inverter insert the RJ45 plug into the "RS-485 out" socket.
5 Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
6 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters
Fronius with ComCard
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 41 of 374
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using the RS485 data cable with an RJ45 plug
Where to connect: RJ45 socket inside the inverter (on the
retrofitted RS485 interface)
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Run the wire from inverter 1 to inverter 2 through the hole for the
wire on the bottom of the unit.
3 Insert the RJ45 plug into the "RS485 in" socket in inverter 1.
4 Insert the other end of the cable with the RJ45 plug into the "RS485
out" socket in inverter.
5 Connect the other inverters using the "RS-485 in" and "RS485 out"
sockets.
Two cables will be run through each inverter.
6 Close inverters.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Setting: Using the inverter operating display.
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions.
4.8 Fronius with ComCard
Overview
The Fronius ComCard RS422 interface integrated as an option;
otherwise can be retrofitted using "ComCard retrofit".
Where to connect: RJ45 socket on the outside of the inverter
4 wire cabling with 6 pin terminal block connector
Communication address must be allocated.
– Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
– Setting: Using the inverter operating display
– Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• (Install Fronius ComCard RS485 interface into the inverter).
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication address
Connecting the inverters
Fronius with ComCard
42 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Installing Fronius ComCard RS485 interface
Procedure
Install the Fronius ComCard RS485 interface in the inverter in
accordance with the interface card installation instructions.
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made Fronius data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made data cable with RJ45 plug and 6 pin terminal block
connector (Page 17).
Caution
Risk of damage to the unit!
The Solar Log™ also has an RJ45 socket, which must never be connected to
the RJ45 socket on the inverter!
Only connect inverters via the RS485/422 B Solar-Log™
interface.
Procedure
1 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
RJ45 inverter
Terminal PIN
1 4
4 5
5 3
6 6
2 In the inverter insert the RJ45 plug into the IN socket.
3 If only one inverter is to be connected it must be terminated.
On the inverter insert the supplied connection plug into the RJ45
OUT socket.
The connection plug is an 8 pin RJ45 dummy plug with bypassed
wires: Wires 3 and 4 bypassed and wires 5 and 6 bypassed.
4 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485/422
B-socket
Connecting the inverters
Fronius RL
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 43 of 374
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a network cable (patch cable)
Where to connect: RJ45 socket on the outside of the inverter.
Procedure
1 Insert the RJ45 plug in inverter 1 into the OUT socket.
2 Insert the other end of the wire into the IN socket on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter:
Insert the supplied connection plug into the RJ45 OUT socket.
5 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485/422
B-socket
6 Close inverters.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Setting: Using the inverter operating display
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions
4.9 Fronius RL
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: Round socket on inverter
2 pin wiring
Communication address does not have to be assigned.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverters and Solar Log™; Page
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
Connecting the inverters
Fronius RL
44 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
self-made cable connection with the round plug and the terminal
strip plug (Page 17).
The round plug must be obtained from the manufacturer.
Procedure
1. If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as
shown in the following diagram.
Connection socket view
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter
RS485/422 B Round socket
1 1 Data +
3 2 user the cable shield
4 3 Data -
2. Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a 2 wire, shielded data cable.
Where to connect: Round socket on inverter.
Procedure
1. self-made cable connection with round plug and a terminal
block plug (Page 17).
2. Also connect the cable to the next inverter in round plug 1.
3. Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
Connecting the inverters
Danfoss
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 45 of 374
4.10 Danfoss
Overview
Supports devices from the manufacturer Danfoss: UniLynx and
TripleLynx
UniLynx types: integrated interface as of February 2007
TripleLynx types: Interface integrated
Where to connect: 2 RJ45 sockets on the right on the side
cover.
Communication address does not have to be assigned.
4 pin wiring
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made RJ45 data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made cable connection with RS485 data cable and terminal
block connector (Page 17)
Caution
The Master Mode has to be deactivated in the Pro series devices. See the
manufacturer's manual for more detailed instructions.
Connecting the inverters
Danfoss
46 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Procedure
1 Unscrew the side cover as shown in the inverter's instructions.
2 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram:
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
RJ45 inverter
Terminal PIN
1 6
3 1
3 2
4 3
Caution
Risk of damage to the unit!
The Solar Log™ also has an RJ45 socket, which must never be connected to
the RJ45 socket on the inverter!
Only connect the inverter using the RS485/422 B interface of the
Solar Log™ or on the Solar Log1000
also via the RS485 A
interface.
3 If only one inverter is to be connected it must be terminated.
Insert the connection plug into the free RJ45 socket on the inverter.
The connection plug is an 8 pin RJ45 dummy plug with bypassed
wires: Wires 3 and 4 bypassed and wires 5 and 6 bypassed.
4 Screw the inverter cover on again.
5 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other (Solar Log500, Solar
Log1000)
Connect using a network cable (patch cable)
Where to connect: 2 RJ45 sockets on the right on the side
cover.
Procedure
1 Unscrew the side cover as shown in the inverter's instructions.
2 Insert the RJ45 plug into any RJ45 socket on the first inverter.
3 Insert the other end of the wire into any RJ45 socket on inverter 2.
4 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
5 Terminate in the last inverter.
Insert the connection plug into the free RJ45 socket.
6 Screw the inverter cover on again.
Connecting the inverters
Mitsubishi with RS485 interface
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 47 of 374
4.11 Mitsubishi with RS485 interface
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: 2 RJ11 sockets inside the inverter.
2 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication address
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made RJ11 data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made cable connection with RJ11 data cable and terminal
block connector (Page 17).
Procedure
1 Unscrew the front plate of the inverter as shown in the inverter's
instructions.
2 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
RJ11 Inverter
Terminal PIN
1 3
4 4
3 Insert the RJ11 plug into any RJ11 socket on the first inverter.
4 If only one inverter is to be connected it must be terminated.
In the inverter, set the DIP switch for the terminal resistor to ON.
5 Screw the front plate inverter on again if no other inverters are to be
connected.
6 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters
Mitsubishi with RS485 interface
48 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a data cable with an RJ11 plug.
Where to connect: 2 RJ11 sockets at the bottom left inside the
inverter.
Procedure
1 Unscrew the front plate of the inverter as shown in the
inverter's instructions.
2 Insert the RJ11 plug into any RJ11 socket on the first inverter.
3 Insert the other end of the wire into any RJ11 socket on inverter 2.
4 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
5 Terminate in the last inverter.
Set the DIP switch for the terminal resistor to ON.
6 Screw the inverter front plate on again.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Setting: Using the inverter operating display.
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions.
Connecting the inverters
Power-One/Aurora
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 49 of 374
4.12 Power-One/Aurora
Overview
Interface integrated
Sometimes different interfaces are used for indoor and outdoor
models.
Where to connect: RS485 terminal strips inside the inverter
3 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication address
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made Power One data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made, shielded 3 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Pull the free wires through the wire opening in the inverter.
3 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter terminal strip (Outdoor)
Terminal Terminal
1 +T/R
3 RTN (GND)
4 -T/R
4 If only one inverter is to be connected it must be terminated.
In the inverter, set the DIP switch for the terminal resistor to ON.
5 Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
6 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a 3 pin, shielded data cable.
Where to connect: RS485 terminal strips inside the inverter
Connecting the inverters
Power-One/Aurora
50 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Connect terminals +T/R, -T/R and RTN of inverter 1 to the
corresponding terminals on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter:
Set the DIP switch for the terminal resistor to ON.
5 Close inverters.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering from Solar Log™,
starting from 2 (not 1!).
Setting: Using the inverter operating display.
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions.
Connecting the inverters
Sunways – AT/NT/PT
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 51 of 374
4.13 Sunways – AT/NT/PT
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter
– 750 V models: 4 RS485 terminals on 10 pin terminal strip
– 850 V models: 4 pin RS485 terminal strip
2 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication address
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made Sunways data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made, shielded 2 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Pull the free wires through the wire opening in the inverter.
3 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter terminal strip
Terminal Terminal
1 RS485+
4 RS485-
4 If only one inverter is to be connected it must be terminated.
Set the supplied jumper JP In the inverter.
5 Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
6 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters
Vaillant – auroPOWER VPI /1 and VPI (RS485)
52 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a 2 wire, shielded data cable.
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter
– 750 V models: 4 RS485 terminals on 10 pin terminal strip
– 850 V models: 4 pin RS485 terminal strip
The RS485 connections on the terminal strip are each double
connections so that the wiring can be continued to the next inverter.
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Connect terminals RS485+ and RS485- on all inverters to the two
data cable wires in accordance with the inverter instructions.
3 Terminate in the last inverter: Set the supplied jumper JP.
4 Close inverters.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Setting: Using the inverter operating display.
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions.
4.14 Vaillant – auroPOWER VPI /1 and VPI (RS485)
Overview
VPI until 2005 RS485 interface can be retrofitted by the
manufacturer. Interface integrated - activate using
operating display.
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter.
2 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Models until 2005 Retrofit RS485 interface
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication address
Connecting the inverters
Vaillant – auroPOWER VPI /1 and VPI (RS485)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 53 of 374
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made, shielded 2 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Pull the free wires through the wire opening in the inverter.
3 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter terminal strip
Terminal Terminal
1 B
4 A
4 If only one inverter is to be connected it must be terminated.
In the inverter connect the free terminal A to terminal B using the
supplied 330 Ω terminating resistor.
Units without transformers: From unit generation VPI xx00 /2 the 330
Ω resistor is switched on using the DIP switch. When the unit is
delivered the terminal resistor is switched on.
5 Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
6 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a 2 wire, shielded data cable.
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter
The RS485 connections on the terminal strip are each double
connections so that the wiring can be continued to the next inverter.
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Connect terminal A on inverter 1 to terminal A on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter: In the inverter connect the free
terminal A to terminal B using the supplied 330 Ω terminating
resistor.
Connecting the inverters
Solutronic SP25-55 (RS485)
54 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Units without transformers: From unit generation VPI xx00 /2 the 330
Ω resistor is switched on using the DIP switch. When the unit is
delivered the terminal resistor is switched on.
5 Close inverters.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Setting:
Units without transformers: using the DIP switch inside the
inverter
Units with transformers: using the inverter operating display.
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions
4.15 Solutronic SP25-55 (RS485)
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: Terminal strip on the outside of the inverter
3 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
All inverters must be fitted with firmware version 1.2.39 or later.
Inverters must be grounded otherwise this could lead to
problems with inverter detection.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication address
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made, shielded 3 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
Connecting the inverters
Solutronic SP25-55 (RS485)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 55 of 374
Procedure
1 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter terminal strip
Terminal Terminal
1 Pin 1 RS485-A
3 Pin 3 GND
4 Pin 2 RS485-B
2 If only one inverter is to be connected it must be terminated.
You will find detailed instructions for setting the inverters on the
Solutronic website.
3 Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected
4 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other (Solar Log500, Solar
Log1000)
Connect using a 3 wire, shielded data cable.
Where to connect: Terminal strip on the outside of the inverter
Procedure
1 Insert the plug into the X2 socket on inverter 1.
2 Insert the other end of the wire into the X2 socket on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter.
You will find detailed instructions for setting the inverters on the
Solutronic website.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Setting: Suing the inverter's control panel (starting with inverter
firmware 2.62 parameter 89 and parameter 230 for older
firmware versions):
In addition, set the COM port to Protocol 1 - Solutronic protocol
(parameter 265).
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions.
Note
To regulate active and reactive power, all of the inverters need to
be set to fixed cos Phi acouading to the manufacurer manual:
Connecting the inverters
Solutronic SP100, SP120 (RS485)
56 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
4.16 Solutronic SP100, SP120 (RS485)
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: Round pin plug on the outside of the inverter.
3 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
All inverters must be fitted with firmware version 1.2.39 or later.
Inverters must be grounded otherwise this could lead to
problems with inverter detection.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication address
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
ready-made data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made, shielded 3 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
Procedure
1 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter terminal strip
Terminal Terminal
1 2 - Data +
3 3 - Ground
4 4 – Data -
2 Terminate pin 1 on the terminal block connector and pin 4 on the
Solar LogTM
using the 120 Ω terminal resistor.
3 Terminate on the inverter in accordance with the manufacturer's
handbook.
4 Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
5 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters
Schüco SGI series (RS485)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 57 of 374
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connection in the master-slave data network using an 1:1 cable
with M12 plug connector (available as an optional extra from
Solutronic)
Sockets X6 and X7 are connected to each other electrically.
Where to connect: Round pin plug on the outside of the inverter.
Procedure
1 Insert the plug into the X6 socket on inverter 1.
2 Insert the other end of the wire into the X7 socket on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter in accordance with the manufacturer's
handbook.
Allocate communication address
Setting: Using the inverter's control panel, parameter 89 in the
communication menu.
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Set this in the SSP address menu item.
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions.
Note
To regulate active and reactive power, all of the inverters need to
be set to fixed cos Phi acouading to the manufacurer manual:
4.17 Schüco SGI series (RS485)
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: RJ45 socket on the bottom of the inverter
2 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication address
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
Connecting the inverters
Schüco SGI series (RS485)
58 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
ready-made data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made cable connection with RJ5 data cable and terminal
block connector (Page 17).
Caution
Risk of damage to the unit!
The Solar Log™ also has an RJ45 socket, which must never be
connected to the RJ45 socket on the inverter!
Only connect the inverter using the RS485/422 B interface
of the Solar Log™ or on the Solar Log1000
also via the
RS485 A interface.
Procedure
1 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
RJ45 inverter
Terminal PIN
4 3 (A)
1 6 (B)
2 Open the unit cover on the bottom of the inverter.
3 Insert the RJ45 plug into the RJ45 socket on the inverter.
4 If only one inverter is to be connected it must be terminated.
Insert the IP20 terminal plug into a free RJ45 socket (not strictly
required for cables up to 100 m long).
5 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
6 Close the unit cover on the bottom of the inverter.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a network cable (patch cable)
Where to connect: RJ45 sockets on the bottom of the inverter
Procedure
1 Open the unit cover on the bottom of the inverter.
2 Insert the RJ45 plug into any RJ45 socket on the first inverter.
3 Insert the other end of the wire into any RJ45 socket on inverter 2.
4 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
5 Terminate in the last inverter.
Insert the IP20 terminal plug into a free RJ45 socket (not strictly
required for cables up to 100 m long).
6 Close the unit cover on the bottom of the inverter.
Connecting the inverters
Schüco SGI series (RS485)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 59 of 374
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Setting: Using the inverter operating display.
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions.
Connecting the inverters
REFUSOL
60 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
4.18 REFUSOL
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: RJ45 socket on the bottom of the inverter
2 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication address
Instructions for older Solar Log™/ Refu installations
Set compatibility Page 62
Note
To use active and reactive power regulation, all of the inverters
need to be set to:
Protocol 1
57600 baud
Parameter 1164 = 2
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
self-made, shielded 2 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
Procedure
1 Connect wires as shown in the diagram below:
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
RS485 inverter socket
Terminal PIN
1 2
4 3
2 If only one inverter is to be connected it must be terminated.
On the sockets "RS485 OUT" with REFUSOL round plugs bypass
the connections PIN1 to PIN2 and PIN3 to PIN4.
3 Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
4 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters
REFUSOL
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 61 of 374
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using
– an 2 wire shielded data cable and
– 4 pin "SACC-M12MS-4SC" plugs (2 supplied with the inverter).
Where to connect: RS485 sockets on the bottom of the inverter.
The RS485 IN and OUT sockets are each double connections so
that the wiring can be continued to the next inverter.
Procedure
1 Connect the data cable to the "SACC-M12MS-4SC" plug as shown
in the inverter's instructions.
2 Insert one plug into the OUT (X14B) socket of inverter 1.
3 Insert the other end of the wire into the IN socket (X15B) on inverter
2.
4 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
5 Terminate in the last inverter.
On the sockets "RS485 OUT" with REFUSOL round plugs bypass
the connections PIN1 to PIN2 and PIN3 to PIN4.
6 Close inverters.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1;
highest possible address: 31.
Set the following parameters on the inverter's operating display:
1 Press "F1", select Numerical list, press "ENTER".
2 Set parameter number 2000 [password protection],
press "ENTER" twice.
3 Enter 72555, press "ENTER"
4 Set parameter number 0406, press "ENTER"
5 Select sub parameter 0406,3, press "ENTER"
6 Enter figure for communication x
[x = continuous numbering starting with 1; highest possible address:
31], press "ENTER". 31], press "ENTER".
After configuring on the display:
1 Using the installed DC isolating switch turn the inverters on and off
briefly so that the settings are activated.
2 Set the date and time on the inverter as shown in the inverter
instructions.
Connecting the inverters
REFUSOL
62 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Older Solar Log™ / Refu installations: Set compatibility
With earlier Solar Log™ / Refu installations, the inverter had to be set
with additional parameters for Solar Log™ compatibility. This is only still
necessary if an inverter has been replaced because it was faulty or if
the system is extended. In these cases the new inverters must also be
provided with the extended parameters again.
The extended parameters are only available starting from inverter
firmware version 800.2.20 or higher. The firmware version can be
checked on the inverter menu:
"F1" / Numerical list / Parameters 1.1 to 1.3
Current firmware versions and update instructions can be found at
www.refu-elektronik.de.
Set the following parameters on the inverter's operating display:
1 Press "F1"
2 Select Numerical list, press "ENTER".
3 Set parameter number 0407, press "ENTER"
4 Select sub parameter 0407,3, press "ENTER"
5 Enter "2" [Communication type RS485: Solarlog], press
"ENTER".31], press "ENTER".
6 Set parameter number 0420, press "ENTER"
7 Select sub parameter 0420,3, press "ENTER"
8 Enter 9600, press "ENTER"
9 Using the installed DC isolating switch turn the inverters on and off
briefly so that the settings are activated.
Note:
The numerical value "2" under point 5 in the settings refers to the old Solar-
Log protocol and the value "1" to the native protocol for active and reactive
power control.
The value under point 8 refers to the inverter's baud rate and is 9600 for the
old Solar-Log protocol and 57600 for the native protocol.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Setting: Using the inverter operating display
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions
Note
To use reactive power, all of the inverters need to be set to:
Protocol 1
Connecting the inverters
REFUSOL
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 63 of 374
57600 baud
Parameter 1164 = 2
Connecting the inverters
Kostal Pico and Solar factory Convert T inverter (RS485)
64 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
4.19 Kostal Pico and Solar factory Convert T inverter (RS485)
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter
3 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Multi-string technology
Pico / Convert inverters are fitted with several MPP trackers: Each
string input is monitored separately and ideally adjusted to the
connected modules.
Depending on any parallel connections inside the inverter the Solar
Log™ can read the data from up to 3 individual strings.
During the inverter detection, the Solar LogTM
automatically detects
how many MPP trackers are active; only the active MPP trackers are
displayed. The inverter must be feeding data in for successful
detection.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication address
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made, shielded 3 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Pull the free wires through the wire opening in the inverter.
3 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter terminal strip
Terminal Terminal
1 A
3 GND
4 B
Connecting the inverters
Kostal Pico and Solar factory Convert T inverter (RS485)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 65 of 374
4 If only one inverter is to be connected terminate this in accordance
with the inverter instructions.
5 Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
6 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a 3 wire, shielded data cable.
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter.
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Connect terminals A, B and GND of inverter 1 to the corresponding
terminals on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter in accordance with the inverter
instructions.
5 Close inverters.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Setting: Using the inverter operating display.
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions.
Connecting the inverters
Mastervolt (RS485)
66 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
4.20 Mastervolt (RS485)
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: RJ45 plug outside the housing floor.
2 pin wiring
Communication address does not have to be assigned.
Multi-string technology
Mastervolt inverters are fitted with 1 or 2 MPP trackers depending on
the model. Each string input is monitored separately and ideally
adjusted to the connected modules. Some inverters are also divided
internally into 2 or even 3 individual inverters. For example, the
QS6400 is recognized as 2 inverters each with 2 strings, an XL 15
as 3 independent XL5000s.
The Solar Log™ automatically detects how many inverters and
strings are active during inverter detection.
Note
The order in which the inverters are displayed in the Solar Log™
after detection is random. We strongly recommend that you
change the order of the inverters immediately after detection at
startup, in the Configuration/Basis/Inverters dialog box (Page
236).
The inverters can be identified using the displayed serial number.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made Mastervolt data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made cable connection with RS485 plug and terminal block
connector (Page 17).
Connecting the inverters
Mastervolt (RS485)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 67 of 374
Caution
Risk of damage to the unit!
The Solar Log™ also has an RJ45 socket, which must never be
connected to the RJ45 socket on the inverter!
Only connect the inverter using the RS485/422 B interface
of the Solar Log™ or on the Solar Log1000
also via the
RS485 A interface.
Procedure
1 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram:
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
RJ45 inverter
Terminal PIN
1 4
4 3
2 Insert the RJ45 plug into the RJ45 socket on the inverter.
3 If only one inverter is to be connected terminate this in accordance
with the inverter instructions.
4 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a network cable (patch cable)
Where to connect: RJ45 plug outside the housing floor
Procedure
1 Insert the RJ45 plug into any RJ45 socket on the first inverter.
2 Insert the other end of the wire into any RJ45 socket on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter in accordance with the inverter
instructions.
Connecting the inverters
AEG PS
68 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
4.21 AEG PS
Overview
Interface not integrated; Retrofit RS485 interface card.
4 pin cable – only on RS485/422 B-connection of the Solar
Log™
Communication address does not have to be assigned.
Multi-string technology
AEG inverters are fitted with 1 or 3 MPP trackers depending on the
model. Each string input is monitored separately and ideally
adjusted to the connected modules.
The Solar Log™ automatically detects how many inverters and
strings are active during inverter detection.
Note
The order in which the inverters are displayed in the Solar Log™
after detection is random. We strongly recommend that you
change the order of the inverters immediately after detection at
startup, in the Configuration/Basis/Inverters dialog box (Page
236).
The inverters can be identified using the displayed serial number.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Install the RS485 interface in the inverter
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
Installing the RS485 interface
Procedure
Insert the RS485 interface in the bottom of the inverter in
accordance with the interface card installation instructions and
screw in.
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made, shielded 4 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
Note concerning Solar Log1000
:
Only connect inverter using the RS485/422 B interface.
Connecting the inverters
AEG PS
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 69 of 374
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Pull the free wires through the wire opening in the inverter.
3 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter terminal strip
Terminal Terminal
1 R+
4 R-
5 T+
6 T-
4 If only one inverter is to be connected terminate this in accordance
with the inverter instructions.
5 Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
6 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a 4 wire, shielded data cable.
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter (on the
retrofitted RS485 interface).
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Connect terminals R+, R-, T+ and T- of inverter 1 to the
corresponding terminals on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter in accordance with the inverter
instructions.
5 Close inverters.
Connecting the inverters
Eaton
70 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
4.22 Eaton
Overview
Interface not integrated; Retrofit RS485 interface card.
4 pin cable – only on RS485/422 B connection of the Solar
Log™
Communication address does not have to be assigned.
Multi-string technology
Eaton inverters are fitted with 1 or 3 MPP trackers depending on the
model. Each string input is monitored separately and ideally
adjusted to the connected modules.
The Solar Log™ automatically detects how many inverters and
strings are active during inverter detection.
Note
The order in which the inverters are displayed in the Solar Log™
after detection is random. We strongly recommend that you
change the order of the inverters immediately after detection at
startup, in the Configuration/Basis/Inverters dialog box (Page
236).
The inverters can be identified using the displayed serial number.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Install the RS485 interface in the inverter
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
Installing the RS485 interface
Procedure
Insert the RS485 interface in the bottom of the inverter in
accordance with the interface card installation instructions and
screw in.
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made, shielded 4 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
Note concerning Solar Log1000
:
Only connect inverter using the RS485/422 B interface.
Connecting the inverters
Eaton
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 71 of 374
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Pull the free wires through the wire opening in the inverter.
3 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter terminal strip
Terminal Terminal
1 R+
4 R-
5 T+
6 T-
4 If only one inverter is to be connected terminate this in accordance
with the inverter instructions.
5 Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
6 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a 4 wire, shielded data cable.
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter (on the
retrofitted RS485 interface)
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Connect terminals R+, R-, T+ and T- of inverter 1 to the
corresponding terminals on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter in accordance with the inverter's
instructions.
5 Close inverters.
Connecting the inverters
Sunville
72 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
4.23 Sunville
Overview
Interface not integrated; Retrofit RS485 interface card.
4 pin cable – only on RS485/422 B connection of the Solar
Log™
Communication address does not have to be assigned.
Multi-string technology
The Sunville inverters are fitted with 1 or 3 MPP trackers depending
on the model. Each string input is monitored separately and ideally
adjusted to the connected modules.
The Solar Log™ automatically detects how many inverters and
strings are active during inverter detection.
Note
The order in which the inverters are displayed in the Solar Log™
after detection is random. We strongly recommend that you
change the order of the inverters immediately after detection at
startup, in the Configuration/Basis/Inverters dialog box (Page
236).
The inverters can be identified using the displayed serial number.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Install the RS485 interface in the inverter
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
Installing the RS485 interface
Procedure
Insert the RS485 interface in the bottom of the inverter in
accordance with the interface card installation instructions and
screw in.
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made, shielded 4 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
Note concerning Solar Log1000
:
Only connect inverter using the RS485/422 B interface.
Connecting the inverters
Sunville
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 73 of 374
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Pull the free wires through the wire opening in the inverter.
3 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter terminal strip
Terminal Terminal
1 R+
4 R-
5 T+
6 T-
4 Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected
5 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a 4 wire, shielded data cable.
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter (on the
retrofitted RS485 interface).
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Connect terminals R+, R-, T+ and T- of inverter 1 to the
corresponding terminals on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Close inverters.
Connecting the inverters
Riello
74 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
4.24 Riello
Overview
Interface not integrated; Retrofit RS485 interface card.
4 pin cable – only on RS485/422 B connection of the Solar
Log™
Communication address does not have to be assigned.
Multi-string technology
Riello inverters are fitted with 1 or 3 MPP trackers depending on the
model. Each string input is monitored separately and ideally
adjusted to the connected modules.
The Solar Log™ automatically detects how many inverters and
strings are active during inverter detection.
Note
The order in which the inverters are displayed in the Solar Log™
after detection is random. We strongly recommend that you
change the order of the inverters immediately after detection at
startup, in the Configuration/Basis/Inverters dialog box (Page
236).
The inverters can be identified using the displayed serial number.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Install the RS485 interface in the inverter
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
Installing the RS485 interface
Procedure
Insert the RS485 interface in the bottom of the inverter in
accordance with the interface card installation instructions and
screw in.
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made, shielded 4 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
Note concerning Solar Log1000
:
Only connect inverter using the RS485/422 B interface.
Connecting the inverters
Riello
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 75 of 374
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Pull the free wires through the wire opening in the inverter.
3 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter terminal strip
Terminal Terminal
1 R+
4 R-
5 T+
6 T-
4 If only one inverter is to be connected terminate this in accordance
with the inverter instructions.
5 Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected
6 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a 4 wire, shielded data cable.
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter (on the
retrofitted RS485 interface)
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Connect terminals R+, R-, T+ and T- of inverter 1 to the
corresponding terminals on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter in accordance with the inverter
instructions.
5 Close inverters.
Connecting the inverters
Diehl AKO with RS485 interface
76 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
4.25 Diehl AKO with RS485 interface
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: RJ45 socket on the bottom of the inverter
2 pin wiring
Communication address does not have to be assigned.
Note
The order in which the inverters are displayed in the Solar Log™
after detection is random. We strongly recommend that you
change the order of the inverters immediately after detection at
startup, in the Configuration/Basis/Inverters dialog box (Page
236).
The inverters can be identified using the displayed serial number.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made cable connection with RJ5 data cable and terminal
block connector (Page 17).
Procedure
1 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
RJ45 inverter
Terminal PIN
1 PIN 6 (A)
4 PIN 3 (B)
2 Insert the RJ45 plug into the RJ45 socket on the inverter.
3 If only one inverter is to be connected terminate this in accordance
with the inverter instructions.
4 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters
Diehl AKO with RS485 interface
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 77 of 374
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a network cable (patch cable).
Where to connect: RJ45 sockets on the bottom of the inverter.
Procedure
1 Insert the RJ45 plug into any RJ45 socket on the first inverter.
2 Insert the other end of the wire into any RJ45 socket on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter in accordance with the inverter's
instructions.
Connecting the inverters
Diehl H series
78 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
4.26 Diehl H series
Overview
Integrated interface
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter
2-pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar-Log™ (Page 19)
• Connect the inverter to the Solar-Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Configure the inverter's communication interface
• Allocate communication address
Connect the inverter to the Solar-Log™
The wiring is done using a
self-made, shielded 2 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
Procedure
1 Connect wires as shown in the diagram below:
Solar-Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter terminal strip
Terminal Terminal
1 B (Data +)
4 A (Data -)
2 If only one inverter is to be connected, terminate this in accordance
with the inverter instructions.
3 Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
4 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar-Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar-Log500, Solar-Log1000)
Connect the inverters to each other
via the RS485 interface. The set up for the connections is explained in
the inverter manufacturer's manual.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Connecting the inverters
Ingeteam
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 79 of 374
Setting: Using the inverter operating display.
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions.
Subsequent configuration
Activate the RS485 interface via the inverter's operating display.
Note
Pay particular attention to the instructions in the installation manual regarding
the address types, activating the communication interface and the
master/slave mode.
4.27 Ingeteam
Overview
Interface not integrated; Retrofit RS485 interface card.
3 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Install the RS485 interface in the inverter
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication address
Installing the RS485 interface
In the 8-pin connection socket, insert the appropriate plug (Phoenix
plug type: FKCT 2.5/8-ST) with RS485 wiring.
Procedure
Install the RS485 interface in the inverter in accordance with the
interface card installation instructions.
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
self-made, shielded 3 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
Connecting the inverters
Ingeteam
80 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Pull the free wires through the wire opening in the inverter.
3 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter terminal strip
Terminal Terminal
1 Pin 1 RS485 A (+)
3 Pin 6 GND
4 Pin 2 RS485 B (-)
4 If only one inverter is to be connected it must be terminated.
Insert jumper JP3 into the RS485 card.
5 Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
6 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a 3 wire, shielded data cable.
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter (on the
retrofitted RS485 interface)
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Connect terminals "Pin 1-RS485-A (+)", "Pin 6-GND" and "Pin 2-
RS485-B (-)" of inverter 1 to the corresponding terminals on inverter
2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter.
Insert jumper JP3 into the RS485 card.
5 Close inverters.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Setting: Using the inverter operating display.
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions.
Connecting the inverters
Voltwerk (only for Solar Log1000)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 81 of 374
4.28 Voltwerk (only for Solar Log1000)
Note
Voltwerk inverters can only be connected to the Solar Log1000
, as
only this one has a CAN interface.
The following description relates to inverters without transformers
produced in or after 2007.
Overview
CAN only be used on Solar Log1000
(CAN interface).
Interface integrated
Where to connect: CAN socket on the outside of the bottom of
the inverter.
Only use ready-made cable sets.
Two different special cable sets must be ordered separately.
– Prefabricated cable set between the Solar Log1000
and the first
inverter, including cable termination.
– Ready-made cable set with 5 pin Phoenix contact connection
plug for connecting the inverters to each other.
Depending on the number of inverters several of these cables will
be required.
Maximum total cable length: 200 m
Communication address does not have to be assigned.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
Connecting inverters to the Solar Log™
Connection is only done using a ready-made data cable, specially for
connecting to the Solar Log1000
(optional extra; not supplied).
Procedure
1 Insert the CAN plug into the inverter CAN IN socket.
2 If only one inverter is to be connected it must be terminated.
Insert the two 5 pin 120 Ω terminal resistors from the ready-made
cable set into the CAN OUT socket.
3 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log1000
CAN
socket.
Connecting the inverters
Conergy (only Solar-Log1000)
82 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Connecting the inverters to each other (only Solar Log1000)
Connection is made only with a ready-made data cable specially
for connecting the inverters to each other (optional extra: not
supplied).
Where to connect: CAN socket outside the inverter.
Procedure
1 Insert the CAN plug into any CAN OUT socket on inverter 1.
2 Insert the other end of the wire into any CAN IN socket on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter.
Insert the two 5 pin 120 Ω terminal resistors from the ready-made
cable set into the CAN OUT socket.
4.29 Conergy (only Solar-Log1000)
Note
Conergy inverters can only be connected to the Solar Log1000
, as
only this model has a CAN interface.
The following description relates to inverters without transformers
produced in or after 2007.
Overview
CAN only be used on Solar Log1000
(CAN interface).
Interface integrated
Where to connect: CAN socket on the outside of the bottom of
the inverter.
Only use ready-made cable sets.
Two different special cable sets must be ordered separately.
– Prefabricated cable set between the Solar Log1000
and the first
inverter, including cable termination.
– Ready-made cable set with 5 pin Phoenix contact connection
plug for connecting the inverters to each other.
Depending on the number of inverters several of these cables will
be required.
Maximum total cable length: 200 m
Communication address does not have to be assigned.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
Connecting the inverters
Conergy (only Solar-Log1000)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 83 of 374
Connecting inverters to the Solar Log™
Connection is only done using a ready-made data cable, specially for
connecting to the Solar Log1000
(optional extra; not supplied).
Procedure
1 Insert the CAN plug into the inverter CAN IN socket.
2 If only one inverter is to be connected it must be terminated.
Insert the two 5 pin 120 Ω terminal resistors from the ready-made
cable set into the CAN OUT socket.
3 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log1000
CAN
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other (only Solar Log1000)
Connection is made only with a ready-made data cable specially
for connecting the inverters to each other (optional extra: not
supplied).
Where to connect: CAN socket outside the inverter.
Procedure
1 Insert the CAN plug into any CAN OUT socket on inverter 1.
2 Insert the other end of the wire into any CAN IN socket on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter.
Insert the two 5 pin 120 Ω terminal resistors from the ready-made
cable set into the CAN OUT socket.
Connecting the inverters
Suntechnics (only Solar Log1000)
84 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
4.30 Suntechnics (only Solar Log1000)
Note
Suntechnics inverters can only be connected to the Solar Log1000
,
as only this model has a CAN interface.
The following description relates to inverters without transformers
produced in or after 2007.
Overview
CAN only be used on Solar Log1000
(CAN interface).
Interface integrated
Where to connect: CAN socket on the outside of the bottom of
the inverter.
Only use ready-made cable sets.
Two different special cable sets must be ordered separately.
– Prefabricated cable set between the Solar Log1000
and the first
inverter, including cable termination.
– Ready-made cable set with 5 pin Phoenix contact connection
plug for connecting the inverters to each other.
Depending on the number of inverters several of these cables will
be required.
Maximum total cable length: 200 m
Communication address does not have to be assigned.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
Connecting inverters to the Solar Log™
Connection is only done using a ready-made data cable, specially for
connecting to the Solar Log1000
(optional extra; not supplied).
Procedure
1 Insert the CAN plug into the inverter CAN IN socket.
2 If only one inverter is to be connected it must be terminated.
Insert the two 5 pin 120 Ω terminal resistors from the ready-made
cable set into the CAN OUT socket.
3 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log1000
CAN
socket.
Connecting the inverters
Effekta
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 85 of 374
Connecting the inverters to each other (only Solar Log1000)
Connection is made only with a special ready-made data cable
for connecting the inverters to each other (optional extra: not
supplied).
Where to connect: CAN socket outside the inverter.
Procedure
1 Insert the CAN plug into any CAN OUT socket on inverter 1.
2 Insert the other end of the wire into any CAN IN socket on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter.
Insert the two 5 pin 120 Ω terminal resistors from the ready-made
cable set into the CAN OUT socket.
4.31 Effekta
Overview
Interface not integrated; Retrofit Effeckta RS485 interface.
3 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Install the RS485 interface in the inverter
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication address
Installing the RS485 interface
Procedure
Install the RS485 interface in the inverter in accordance with the
interface card installation instructions.
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made, shielded 3 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
Connecting the inverters
Effekta
86 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter terminal strip
Terminal Terminal
1 Pin 2 RS485 A (+)
3 Pin 3 GND
4 Pin 1 RS485 B (-)
3 If only one inverter is to be connected it must be terminated.
Set the jumper on the RS485 interface card to ON.
4 Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
5 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a 3 wire, shielded data cable.
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter (on the
retrofitted RS485 interface).
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Using the data cable connect terminals "Pin 2-RS485-A (+)", "Pin 3-
GND" and "Pin 1-RS485-B (-)" of inverter 1 to the corresponding
terminals on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter.
Set the jumper on the RS485 interface card to ON.
5 Close inverters.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Setting: Using the inverter operating display.
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions.
Connecting the inverters
ALPHA-SOL
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 87 of 374
4.32 ALPHA-SOL
Overview
Interface not integrated; Retrofit RS485 interface card.
4 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Allocate communication address
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Install the RS485 interface in the inverter
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Setting: Using the DIP switch on the interface card.
Before installing the RS485 interface card:
Allocate the communication address using the 8 interface card DIP
switches:
Example - Communication address 1:
On x
Off
DIP switch 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Example - Communication address 2:
On
Off
DIP
switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Example - Communication address 3:
On
Off
DIP
switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Connecting the inverters
ALPHA-SOL
88 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Example - Communication address 4:
On
Off
DIP
switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Example - Communication address 5:
On
Off
DIP
switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
You will find more information at:
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Binary_number.
Installing the RS485 interface
Procedure
Install the RS485 interface in the inverter in accordance with the
interface card installation instructions.
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made BKL2 data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made, shielded 4 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Pull the free wires through the wire opening in the inverter.
3 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter terminal strip
Terminal Terminal
1 R+
1 T+
4 R-
4 T-
Connecting the inverters
Europa-Solar AG
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 89 of 374
4 If only one inverter is to be connected terminate this in accordance
with the inverter instructions.
5 Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
6 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a 4 wire, shielded data cable.
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter on the
retrofitted RS485 interface card
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Connect terminals R+, T+, R- and R+ of inverter 1 to the
corresponding terminals on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter in accordance with the inverter
instructions.
5 Close inverters.
4.33 Europa-Solar AG
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: RJ45 socket inside the inverter
4 pin cable – only on RS485/422 B connection of the Solar
Log™
Communication address does not have to be assigned.
Note
The order in which the inverters are displayed in the Solar Log™
after detection is random. We strongly recommend that you
change the order of the inverters immediately after detection at
startup, in the Configuration/Basis/Inverters dialog box (Page
236).
The inverters can be identified using the displayed serial number.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
Connecting the inverters
Europa-Solar AG
90 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made BRJ1 data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made cable connection with RS485 data cable and terminal
block connector (Page 17).
Caution
Risk of damage to the unit!
The Solar Log™ also has an RJ45 socket, which must never be
connected to the RJ45 socket on the inverter!
Only connect inverters via the RS485/422 B Solar Log™
interface.
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
RJ45 inverter
Terminal PIN
1 Pin 3
4 Pin 6
5 Pin 1
6 Pin 2
3 Insert the RJ45 plug into any RJ45 socket on the first inverter.
4 If only one inverter is to be connected terminate this in accordance
with the inverter instructions.
5 Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected
6 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485/422
B socket
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a network cable (patch cable).
Where to connect: RJ45 socket inside the inverter.
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Insert the RJ45 plug into any RJ45 socket on the first inverter.
3 Insert the other end of the wire into any RJ45 socket on inverter 2.
4 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
Connecting the inverters
Ever-Solar
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 91 of 374
5 Terminate in the last inverter in accordance with the inverter
instructions.
6 Close inverters.
4.34 Ever-Solar
Overview
Interface not integrated; Retrofit RS485 interface card.
Where to connect: RJ45 socket on the outside of the inverter.
4 pin cable – only on RS485/422 B connection of the Solar
Log™
Communication address does not have to be assigned.
Note
The order in which the inverters are displayed in the Solar Log™
after detection is random. We strongly recommend that you
change the order of the inverters immediately after detection at
startup, in the Configuration/Basis/Inverters dialog box (Page
236).
The inverters can be identified using the displayed serial number.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Install the RS485 interface in the inverter
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
Installing the RS485 interface
Procedure
Insert the RS485 interface in the bottom of the inverter in
accordance with the interface card installation instructions and
screw in.
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made BRJ1 data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made cable connection with RS485 plug and terminal block
connector (Page 17).
Connecting the inverters
Ever-Solar
92 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Caution
Risk of damage to the unit!
The Solar Log™ also has an RJ45 socket, which must never be
connected to the RJ45 socket on the inverter!
Only connect inverters via the RS485/422 B Solar Log™
interface.
Note concerning Solar Log1000
:
Only connect inverter using the RS485/422 B interface.
1 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
RJ45 inverter
Terminal PIN
1 Pin 3
4 Pin 6
5 Pin 1
6 Pin 2
2 Insert the RJ45 plug into any RJ45 socket on the first inverter.
3 If only one inverter is to be connected terminate this in accordance
with the inverter instructions.
4 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485/422
B socket
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a network cable (patch cable).
Where to connect: RJ45 socket on the outside of the inverter.
Procedure
1 Insert the RJ45 plug into any RJ45 socket on the first inverter.
2 Insert the other end of the wire into any RJ45 socket on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter in accordance with the inverter
instructions.
Connecting the inverters
Evoco
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 93 of 374
4.35 Evoco
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: Between the COM round sockets on the
outside of the inverter.
2 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication address
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made data cable (supplied with the inverter).
or
self-made, shielded 2 wire data cable with round plug and
terminal block connector (Page17).
Procedure
1 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter round socket
Terminal PIN
1 1
4 2
2 Insert the round plug into any COM round socket on the inverter.
3 If only one inverter is to be connected terminate this in accordance
with the inverter's instructions.
4 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using an Evoco daisy chain cable.
Where to connect: Between the COM round sockets on the
outside of the inverter.
Connecting the inverters
Powercom
94 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Procedure
1 Insert the round plug into any round socket on inverter 1.
2 Insert the other end of the wire into any round socket on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter in accordance with the inverter
instructions.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Default settings on the inverter: Communication address 1
Setting: Using the inverter operating display
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions
4.36 Powercom
Overview
Interface not integrated; Retrofit RS485 interface card.
4 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Allocate communication address
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Install the RS485 interface in the inverter
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Setting: Using the DIP switch on the interface card.
Before installing the RS485 interface card.
Allocate the communication address using the 8 interface card DIP
switches:
Connecting the inverters
Powercom
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 95 of 374
Example - Communication address 1:
On x
Off
DIP switch 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Example - Communication address 2:
On
Off
DIP
switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Example - Communication address 3:
On
Off
DIP
switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Example - Communication address 4:
On
Off
DIP
switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Example - Communication address 5:
On
Off
DIP
switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
You will find more information at:
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Binary_number.
Connecting the inverters
Powercom
96 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Installing the RS485 interface
Procedure
Install the RS485 interface in the inverter in accordance with the
interface card installation instructions.
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made BKL2 data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made, shielded 4 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Pull the free wires through the wire opening in the inverter.
3 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter terminal strip
Terminal Terminal
1 R+
1 T+
4 R-
4 T-
4 Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected
5 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a 4 wire, shielded data cable.
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter on the
retrofitted RS485 interface card
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Connect terminals R+, T+, R- and R+ of inverter 1 to the
corresponding terminals on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Close inverters.
Connecting the inverters
SALICRU EQX
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 97 of 374
4.37 SALICRU EQX
Overview
Interface not integrated; Retrofit RS485 interface card.
4 pin cable – only on RS485/422 B connection of the Solar
Log™
Communication address does not have to be assigned.
Multi-string technology
The inverters are fitted with 1 or 3 MPP trackers depending on the
model. Each string input is monitored separately and ideally
adjusted to the connected modules.
The Solar Log™ automatically detects how many inverters and
strings are active during inverter detection.
Note
The order in which the inverters are displayed in the Solar Log™
after detection is random. We strongly recommend that you
change the order of the inverters immediately after detection at
startup, in the Configuration/Basis/Inverters dialog box (Page
236).
The inverters can be identified using the displayed serial number.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Install the RS485 interface in the inverter
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
Installing the RS485 interface
Procedure
Insert the RS485 interface in the bottom of the inverter in
accordance with the interface card installation instructions and
screw in.
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made BKL1 data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made, shielded 4 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
Note concerning Solar Log1000
:
Only connect inverter using the RS485/422 B interface.
Connecting the inverters
SALICRU EQX
98 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Pull the free wires through the wire opening in the inverter.
3 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter terminal strip
Terminal Terminal
1 R+
4 R-
5 T+
6 T-
4 If only one inverter is to be connected terminate this in accordance
with the inverter instructions.
5 Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
6 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a 4 wire, shielded data cable.
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter (on the
retrofitted RS485 interface).
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Connect terminals R+, R-, T+ and T- of inverter 1 to the
corresponding terminals on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter in accordance with the inverter's
instructions.
5 Close inverters.
Connecting the inverters
SALICRU EQXLV
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 99 of 374
4.38 SALICRU EQXLV
Overview
Interface integrated
2 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication address
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made, shielded 2 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
Procedure
1 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter terminal strip
Terminal Terminal
1 4 (A in)
4 3 (B in)
2 If only one inverter is to be connected it must be terminated.
Insert 120 Ω terminal resistor.
3 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a 2 wire, shielded data cable.
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter.
Procedure
1 Connect terminal 2 (A out) on inverter 1 to terminal 4 (A in) on
inverter 2.
Connecting the inverters
Santerno
100 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
2 Connect terminal 1 (B out) on inverter 1 to terminal 3 (B in) on
inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter: Insert 120 Ω terminal resistor.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Setting: Using PC software for configuring inverters.
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions.
4.39 Santerno
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: 9 pin socket on the outside of the housing
floor.
2 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Install the RS485 interface in the inverter
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication address
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made Santerno data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made, shielded 2 wire data cable with a 9 pin plug and a
terminal block connector (Page17).
Procedure
1 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter plug
Terminal PIN
1 1 (A-Line)
4 2 (B-Line)
2 Insert the plug into socket A on the inverter.
Connecting the inverters
Santerno
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 101 of 374
3 If only one inverter is to be connected it must be terminated.
Connect socket A on the Santerno Solar Log™ data cable to the
plug of the first Santerno inverter data cable.
4 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Santerno inverter data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
Where to connect: 9 pin socket on the outside of the housing
floor.
Procedure
1 Insert the Santerno inverter data cable plug into socket B of the first
inverter.
2 Insert the Santerno inverter data cable plug into socket C of the first
inverter.
3 Insert the plug on the other end of the cable into socket C of the
second inverter.
4 Connect the other inverters to each other using socket C.
5 Terminate in the last inverter.
Connect socket A on the Santerno Solar Log™ data cable to the
plug of the first Santerno data cable.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Setting: Using the inverter operating display.
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions.
Connecting the inverters
Schneider Electric SunEzy
102 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
4.40 Schneider Electric SunEzy
Overview
Interface not integrated; Retrofit RS485 interface card.
4 pin cable – only on RS485/422 B connection of the Solar
Log™
Communication address does not have to be assigned.
Multi-string technology
The inverters are fitted with 1 or 3 MPP trackers depending on the
model. Each string input is monitored separately and ideally
adjusted to the connected modules.
The Solar Log™ automatically detects how many inverters and
strings are active during inverter detection.
Note
The order in which the inverters are displayed in the Solar Log™
after detection is random. We strongly recommend that you
change the order of the inverters immediately after detection at
startup, in the Configuration/Basis/Inverters dialog box (Page
236).
The inverters can be identified using the displayed serial number.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Install the RS485 interface in the inverter
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
Installing the RS485 interface
Procedure
Insert the RS485 interface in the bottom of the inverter in
accordance with the interface card installation instructions and
screw in.
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made BKL1 data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made, shielded 4 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
Note concerning Solar Log1000
:
Only connect inverter using the RS485/422 B interface.
Connecting the inverters
Schneider Electric SunEzy
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 103 of 374
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Pull the free wires through the wire opening in the inverter.
3 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter terminal strip
RS485/422 B Terminal Terminal
1 R+
4 R-
5 T+
6 T-
4 If only one inverter is to be connected terminate this in accordance
with the inverter instructions.
5 Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected
6 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485/422
B socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other (Solar Log500, Solar
Log1000)
Connect using a 4 wire, shielded data cable.
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter (on the
retrofitted RS485 interface).
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Connect terminals R+, R-, T+ and T- of inverter 1 to the
corresponding terminals on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter in accordance with the inverter
instructions.
5 Close inverters.
Connecting the inverters
Steca
104 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
4.41 Steca
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: RJ socket, on the outside of the inverter's
interface card.
2 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication address
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made RS485 data cable with RJ45 plug and terminal block
connector (Page 17).
Caution
Risk of damage to the unit!
The Solar Log™ also has an RJ45 socket, which must never be
connected to the RJ45 socket on the inverter!
Only connect the inverter using the RS485/422 B interface
of the Solar Log™ or on the Solar-Log1000
also via the
RS485 A interface.
Procedure
1 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
RJ45 inverter
Terminal PIN
1 1
4 2
2 Insert the RJ45 plug into any RJ45 socket on the first inverter.
3 If only one inverter is to be connected it must be terminated.
On the inverter insert the connection plug into the free RJ45 socket.
4 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters
Steca
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 105 of 374
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using the RS485 data cable with RJ45 plug;
Connection cables between the inverters are supplied with the
inverters. Use these.
Where to connect: RJ45 socket on the outside of the inverter
Procedure
1 Insert the RJ45 plug into the free RJ45 socket on the first inverter.
2 Insert the other end of the wire into any RJ45 socket on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter:
Insert the connection plug into the free RJ45 socket.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Setting: Using the rotating switch on the inverter interface card.
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions.
Connecting the inverters
Steca ≥ 17 kW
106 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
4.42 Steca ≥ 17 kW
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: RS485 socket on the bottom of the inverter
2 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication address
Note
To use power-management, all of the inverters need to be set to:
Protocol 1
57600 baud
Parameter 1164 = 2
During the Initial configuration for these inverter Steca >=17k must be
selected.
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
self-made, shielded 2 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
Procedure
1 Connect wires as shown in the diagram below:
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
RS485 inverter socket
Terminal PIN
1 2
4 3
2 If only one inverter is to be connected it must be terminated.
On the sockets "RS485 OUT" with SACC-M12MS-4SC" plugs
bypass the connections PIN1 to PIN2 and PIN3 to PIN4.
3 Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
4 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters
Steca ≥ 17 kW
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 107 of 374
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using
– 2 wire shielded data cable and
– 4 pin "SACC-M12MS-4SC" plugs (2 supplied with the inverter).
Where to connect: RS485 sockets on the bottom of the inverter.
The RS485 IN and OUT sockets are each double connections so
that the wiring can be continued to the next inverter.
Procedure
Connect the data cable to the "SACC-M12MS-4SC" plug as shown in
the inverter's instructions.
Insert one plug into the OUT (X14B) socket of inverter 1.
Insert the other end of the wire into the IN socket (X15B) on inverter 2.
Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
Terminate in the last inverter.
On the sockets "RS485 OUT" with SACC-M12MS-4SC" plugs bypass
the connections PIN1 to PIN2 and PIN3 to PIN4.
Close inverters.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1;
highest possible address: 31.
Set the following parameters on the inverter's operating display:
Press "F1", select Numerical list, press "ENTER".
Set parameter number 2000 [password protection],
press "ENTER" twice.
Enter 72555, press "ENTER"
Set parameter number 0406, press "ENTER"
Select sub parameter 0406,3, press "ENTER"
Enter figure for communication x
[x = continuous numbering starting with 1; highest possible address:
31], press "ENTER". 31], press "ENTER".
After configuring on the display:
Using the installed DC isolating switch turn the inverters on and off
briefly so that the settings are activated.
Set the date and time on the inverter as shown in the inverter
instructions.
Connecting the inverters
WINAICO
108 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
4.43 WINAICO
Interface not integrated; Retrofit RS485 interface card.
4 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Allocate communication address
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Install the RS485 interface in the inverter
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Setting: Using the DIP switch on the interface card.
Before installing the RS485 interface card:
Allocate the communication address using the 8 interface card DIP
switches.
Example - Communication address 1:
On x
Off
DIP switch 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Example - Communication address 2:
On
Off
DIP
switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Example - Communication address 3:
On
Off
DIP
switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Example - Communication address 4:
On
Off
DIP
switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Connecting the inverters
WINAICO
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 109 of 374
Example - Communication address 5:
On
Off
DIP
switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
You will find more information at:
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Binary_number.
Installing the RS485 interface
Procedure
Install the RS485 interface in the inverter in accordance with the
interface card installation instructions.
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made BKL2 data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made, shielded 4 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Pull the free wires through the wire opening in the inverter.
3 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter terminal strip
Terminal Terminal
1 R+
1 T+
4 R-
4 T-
4 If only one inverter is to be connected terminate this in accordance
with the inverter instructions.
5 Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
6 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other (Solar Log500, Solar
Log1000)
Connect using a 4 wire, shielded data cable.
Connecting the inverters
WINAICO
110 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter on the
retrofitted RS485 interface card.
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Connect terminals R+, T+, R- and R+ of inverter 1 to the
corresponding terminals on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter in accordance with the inverter
instructions.
5 Close inverters.
Connecting the inverters
Delta (RS485)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 111 of 374
4.44 Delta (RS485)
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: RJ45 socket on the outside of the inverter
2 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication address
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made Delta data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made cable connection with RS485 data cable and terminal
block connector (Page 17).
Caution
Risk of damage to the unit!
The Solar Log™ also has an RJ45 socket, which must never be
connected to the RJ45 socket on the inverter!
Only connect the inverter using the RS485/422 B interface
of the Solar Log™ or on the Solar-Log1000
also via the
RS485 A interface.
Procedure
1 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
RJ45 inverter
Terminal PIN
1 7
4 6
4 8
Note concerning Solar Log
1000:
The PIN allocation has been changed with the new generation. 3
wired cabling functions with both generations.
Connecting the inverters
Sungrow
112 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
2 Insert the RJ45 plug into the RJ45 socket on the inverter.
3 The inverter must be terminated here.
Insert the 120 Ω resistor into the free RJ45 socket.
4 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
5 Close the unit cover on the bottom of the inverter.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a network cable (patch cable).
Where to connect: RJ45 sockets on the outside of the inverter.
Procedure
1 Insert the RJ45 plug into any RJ45 socket on the first inverter.
2 Insert the other end of the wire into any RJ45 socket on the second
inverter.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter.
Insert the 120 Ω resistor into the free RJ45 socket.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Set the inverter baud rate to 19200.
Setting: Using the inverter operating display.
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions.
4.45 Sungrow
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: RJ45 socket or COM round sockets on the
outside of the inverter
2 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication address
Note:
The inverter's communication connection is then changed to the
from the round socket to RJ45. Currently, the SG1,5KTL is still
Connecting the inverters
Sungrow
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 113 of 374
supplied with round sockets.
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made, shielded 2 wire data cable with round plug and
terminal block connector (Page17).
Procedure
1 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter round socket
for SG1,5KTL
Terminal PIN
1 1 (A)
4 2 (B)
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
RJ45 socket inverter
Terminal PIN
1 3 (Data+ A)
4 6 (Data- B)
2 Insert the plug into the socket on the inverter.
3 If only one inverter is to be connected, terminate this in accordance
with the inverter instructions between round socket Pin 2 and 3 with
120Ω.
4 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting inverters to each other
(Solar Log500,Solar Log1000)
Wiring with a self-made RS485 cable,
RJ45 socket and COM round sockets on the outside of the
inverter,
Procedure
Connect a cable between the RJ45 and round sockets.
Connect the first inverter as explained above.
Connecting the inverters
Sungrow
114 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Connect the second inverter via the RS485/WiFi socket.
Connect wires as shown in the diagram below.
Round socket RS485/WiFi
Inverter 1
RJ45 socket inverter 2
Terminal PIN
3 (B RS485) 3 (Data+ B)
2 (A RS485) 6 (Data- A)
Wiring diagram with several inverters
Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
Terminate the last inverter between round socket Pin 2 and 3 with
120Ω.
Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485 socket.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Setting: Using the inverter operating display.
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions.
Connecting the inverters
Sustainable Energy
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 115 of 374
4.46 Sustainable Energy
Overview
Interface integrated
2 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication address
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made, shielded 2 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
Procedure
1 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter terminal strip
Terminal Terminal
1 4 (A in)
4 3 (B in)
2 If only one inverter is to be connected it must be terminated.
Insert 120 Ω terminal resistor.
3 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a 2 wire, shielded data cable.
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter.
Connecting the inverters
Motech (RS485)
116 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Procedure
1 Connect terminal 2 (A out) on inverter 1 to terminal 4 (A in) on
inverter 2.
2 Connect terminal 1 (B out) on inverter 1 to terminal 3 (B in) on
inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter: Insert 120 Ω terminal resistor.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Setting: Using PC software for configuring inverters.
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions.
4.47 Motech (RS485)
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: RJ45 plug outside the housing floor
2 pin wiring
Communication address does not have to be assigned.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made BRJ2 data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made cable connection with RS485 data cable and terminal
block connector (Page 17).
Caution
Risk of damage to the unit!
The Solar Log™ also has an RJ45 socket, which must never be
connected to the RJ45 socket on the inverter!
Only connect the inverter using the RS485/422 B interface
of the Solar Log™ or on the Solar-Log1000
also via the
RS485 A interface.
Connecting the inverters
Motech (RS485)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 117 of 374
Procedure
1 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
RJ45 inverter
Terminal PIN
1 7
4 8
2 Insert the RJ45 plug into the RJ45 socket on the inverter.
3 If only one inverter is to be connected terminate this in accordance
with the inverter instructions.
4 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a network cable (patch cable)
Where to connect: RJ45 sockets on the outside of the inverter.
Procedure
1 Insert the RJ45 plug into any RJ45 socket on the first inverter.
2 Insert the other end of the wire into any RJ45 socket on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter in accordance with the inverter
instructions.
Connecting the inverters
Zentral Solar Deutschland ZSD (RS485)
118 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
4.48 Zentral Solar Deutschland ZSD (RS485)
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: RJ45 plug outside the housing floor
2 pin wiring
Communication address does not have to be assigned.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made BRJ2 data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made cable connection with RS485 data cable and terminal
block connector (Page 17).
Caution
Risk of damage to the unit!
The Solar Log™ also has an RJ45 socket, which must never be
connected to the RJ45 socket on the inverter!
Only connect the inverter using the RS485/422 B interface
of the Solar Log™ or on the Solar Log1000
also via the
RS485 A interface.
Procedure
1 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
RJ45 inverter
Terminal PIN
1 7
4 8
2 Insert the RJ45 plug into the RJ45 socket on the inverter.
3 If only one inverter is to be connected terminate this in accordance
with the inverter instructions.
4 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters
AROS Solar Technology
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 119 of 374
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a network cable (patch cable)
Where to connect: RJ45 sockets on the outside of the inverter.
Procedure
1 Insert the RJ45 plug into any RJ45 socket on the first inverter.
2 Insert the other end of the wire into any RJ45 socket on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter in accordance with the inverter
instructions.
4.49 AROS Solar Technology
Overview
Interface not integrated; Retrofit RS485 interface card.
Where to connect: RJ45 socket on the outside of the inverter.
4 pin cable – only on RS485/422 B connection of the Solar
Log™
Communication address does not have to be assigned.
Note
The order in which the inverters are displayed in the Solar Log™
after detection is random. We strongly recommend that you
change the order of the inverters immediately after detection at
startup, in the Configuration/Basis/Inverters dialog box (Page
236).
The inverters can be identified using the displayed serial number.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Install the RS485 interface in the inverter
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
Installing the RS485 interface
Procedure
Insert the RS485 interface in the bottom of the inverter in
accordance with the interface card installation instructions and
screw in.
Connecting the inverters
AROS Solar Technology
120 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
self-made cable connection with RS485 data cable and terminal
block connector (Page 17).
Caution
Risk of damage to the unit!
The Solar Log™ also has an RJ45 socket, which must never be
connected to the RJ45 socket on the inverter!
Only connect inverters via the RS485/422 B-Solar-Log™
interface.
Note concerning Solar Log1000
:
Only connect inverter using the RS485/422 B interface.
Procedure
1 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
RJ45 inverter
Terminal PIN
1 PIN 3 – R+
4 PIN 6 – R-
5 PIN 4 – T+
6 PIN 5 – T-
2 Insert the RJ45 plug into any RJ45 socket on the first inverter.
3 If only one inverter is to be connected terminate this in accordance
with the inverter instructions.
4 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485/422
B socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a network cable (patch cable)
Where to connect: RJ45 sockets on the outside of the inverter.
Procedure
1 Insert the RJ45 plug into any RJ45 socket on the first inverter.
2 Insert the other end of the wire into any RJ45 socket on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter in accordance with the inverter
instructions.
Connecting the inverters
General Electric inverters (GE)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 121 of 374
5 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485/422
B socket.
4.50 General Electric inverters (GE)
Overview
Interface integrated
Connected using network cable (patch cable) and Ethernet
router or switch
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Allocate communication address
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Setting: Using the inverter operating display.
Procedure: Before connecting to the Ethernet router or switch
and allocating the IP address.
Connecting inverters and the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
network cable (patch cable) and the
Ethernet router or switch.
Procedure
1 Set different unit IDs on each inverter in accordance with the
inverter's instructions.
2 Connect the Solar Log™ and the inverter to the router or switch.
3 Allocate an IP address to each inverter using the manufacturer's IP
setting kit:
The first three blocks of numbers as for the Solar Log™, e.g.
192.168.178.49
The fourth block of numbers: a free network position, e.g.
192.168.179.50
Details on using the IP setting kit can be found in the manufacturer's
SVT monitoring manual.
Connecting the inverters
Hyundai HPC-050HT-E and HPC-100HT-E
122 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
4.51 Hyundai HPC-050HT-E and HPC-100HT-E
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: RJ45 CN socket on the outside of the
inverter.
2 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication address
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made cable connection with RS485 data cable and terminal
block connector (Page 17).
Caution
Risk of damage to the unit!
The Solar Log™ also has an RJ45 socket, which must never be
connected to the RJ45 socket on the inverter!
Only connect the inverter using the RS485/422 B
interface of the Solar-Log™ or on the Solar Log1000
also via the RS485 A interface.
Procedure
1 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
RJ45 inverter
Terminal PIN
1 3
4 6
2 Insert RJ45 plug into socket CN on the inverter.
3 If only one inverter is to be connected terminate this in accordance
with the inverter instructions.
4 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters
Hyundai HPC-250HT-E
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 123 of 374
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a network cable (patch cable).
Where to connect: RJ45 sockets on the outside of the inverter.
Procedure
1 Insert the RJ45 plug into any RJ45 socket on the first inverter.
2 Insert the other end of the wire into any RJ45 socket on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter in accordance with the inverter
instructions.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Setting: Using the inverter operating display.
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions.
4.52 Hyundai HPC-250HT-E
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: 20 pin connection strip on the outside of the
inverter at the top edge of the i-8142iW module.
2 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication address
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made, shielded 2 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
Connecting the inverters
Hyundai HPC-250HT-E
124 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Caution
Risk of damage to the unit!
The Solar Log™ also has an RJ45 socket, which must never be
connected to the RJ45 socket on the inverter!
Only connect the inverter using the RS485/422 B interface
of the Solar Log™ or on the Solar Log1000
also via the
RS485 A interface.
Procedure
1 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter terminal strip
Terminal Terminal
1 D1+/TxD1+
4 D1–/TxD1–
2 If only one inverter is to be connected terminate this in accordance
with the inverter instructions.
3 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a 2 wire, shielded data cable.
Where to connect: 20 pin connection strip on the inverter at the
top edge of the i-8142iW module.
Procedure
1 Connect terminal D1+/TxD1+ on inverter 1 to terminal D1+/TxD1+
on inverter 2.
2 Connect terminal D1–/TxD1– on inverter 1 to terminal D1–/TxD1– on
inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter in accordance with the inverter
instructions.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Setting: Using PC software for configuring inverters.
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions.
Connecting the inverters
EKO Energy
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 125 of 374
4.53 EKO Energy
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: Between the COM round sockets on the
outside of the inverter.
2 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication address
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made data cable (supplied with the inverter).
or
self-made, shielded 2 wire data cable with round plug and
terminal block connector (Page17).
Procedure
1 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter round socket
Terminal PIN
1 1
4 2
2 Insert the round plug into any COM round socket on the inverter.
3 If only one inverter is to be connected terminate this in accordance
with the inverter instructions.
4 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a self-made daisy chain cable.
Where to connect: Between the COM round sockets on the
outside of the inverter.
Connecting the inverters
Q3 (RS485)
126 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Procedure
1 Insert the round plug into any round socket on inverter 1.
2 Insert the other end of the wire into any round socket on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter in accordance with the inverter
instructions.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Default settings on the inverter: Communication address 1.
Setting: Using the inverter operating display.
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions.
4.54 Q3 (RS485)
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: Between the COM round sockets on the
outside of the inverter.
3 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication address
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
Connecting is done using a self-made, shielded 3 wire data cable and
terminal block connector (Page 17).
Procedure
1 Connect wires as shown in the diagram below.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter terminal strip
Terminal Terminal
1 1 (RS485-A)
3 3 (GND)
4 2 (RS485-B)
Connecting the inverters
Siemens
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 127 of 374
2 If only one inverter is to be connected terminate this in accordance
with the inverter instructions.
3 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a self-made daisy chain cable.
Where to connect: X2 connection socket on outside of the
inverter.
Procedure
1 Insert the plug into socket X2 on inverter 1.
2 Insert the other end of the wire into the X2 socket on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter in accordance with the inverter
instructions.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Default settings on the inverter: Communication address 1.
Setting: Using the inverter operating display.
Notes
– From the Communication / RS485 menu select Address for
ProLog
– From the Communication menu set Protocol type COM 1 to 9.
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions.
4.55 Siemens
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: RJ45 socket on the bottom of the inverter
2 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect inverters to the Solar Log™.
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication address
Connecting the inverters
Siemens
128 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Connecting inverters to the Solar Log™
To connect the Solar Log™ and the inverters prepare cables with the
following pin allocation.
Connecting the Solar Log™ to the first inverter
Solar-Log™
(4/6 pin terminal plug)
First inverter - RS485 IN
(4 pin round plug)
Pin 1 (white) w
i
t
h
Pin 2
Pin 4 (brown) w
i
t
h
Pin 3
If only one inverter is to be connected this must be terminated (see
following item "Bus termination").
Connecting inverters to each other
(Solar-Log500, Solar-Log1000)
Inverters must be connected to each other using shielded data cables
via the RS485 connections located on the SINVERT PVM.
The following illustration shows the main connection diagram.
Use the SACC-M12MS-4SC connectors supplied with the inverter for
data cables.
Connect them as shown in the diagram.
Connect the bus cable on the last inverter to the RS485 OUT
socket using a terminal resistor.
Inverter - RS485 OUT
(4 pin round plug)
Inverter - RS485 IN
(4 pin round plug)
Pin 2 w
i
t
h
Pin 2
Pin 3 w
i
t
h
Pin 3
Connecting the inverters
Siemens
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 129 of 374
Bus termination
The bus must be terminated on the RS485 OUT connection of the last
inverter with 120Ω.
To do this use the internal 120Ω resistor and wire the following pins in a
round 4 pin plug with two jumpers.
Inverter - RS485 OUT
(4 pin round plug)
Pin 1 w
i
t
h
Pin 2
Pin 3 w
i
t
h
Pin 4
Insert this plug into the RS485 OUT socket of the last inverter.
Setting parameters
Parameters are set using the display on the inverter.
The date and time must be correctly set and the password
72555 entered before the communication settings.
The communication parameters are set in the sub-menu
"F1 -> Configuration -> Communication -> RS 485".
The individual menu items are selected with the arrow keys ↑↓
and confirmed by pressing ENTER.
A consecutive communication address must be allocated to
each SINVERT PVM. It is advisable to arrange the addresses
consecutively beginning with 1, i.e. 1, 2, 3 up to a maximum of
31. The Solar Log™ has address "0".
The baud rate can be selected freely but must be set to the
same value for all inverters. Baud rate 9600 must only be used
when using the wireless package.
How to set communication address parameters
1. Select "USS address" and press ENTER.
2. Enter the numerical value xx [Address] and press ENTER.
3. Select "Baud rate" and press ENTER.
4. Enter the numerical value [Baud rate] and press ENTER.
5. Select "Protocol" and press ENTER.
6. Select protocol type "1" and press ENTER.
After the parameters have been set on the display the inverter must be
switched off for one minute using the installed DC isolation switch. The
settings are now applied and set to active. The configuration procedure
is described in the manufacturer's handbook. Starting with Solar LogTM
Connecting the inverters
Albatech APL Trifase 15 / 20
130 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
firmware version 2.0.3 (Nov.09) no other parameters must be set on the
inverter. The setting up (commissioning) can be continued immediately.
Solar Log™ compatibility with older PVM installations
With older Solar Log™ / PVM installations the inverter had to be set
with additional parameters for Solar Log™ compatibility. This is only still
necessary if an inverter has been replaced because it was faulty or if
the system has been extended. Only in these cases must the additional
parameters be set again on the new inverters.
4.56 Albatech APL Trifase 15 / 20
Inverters from different Albatech model ranges (APL monophase /
triphase) cannot be mixed on an RS485 connection. The correct range
must be selected when selecting inverters.
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter
3 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Allocate communication address
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
Note:
If more than 32 inverters are connected a signal amplifier must be
installed in the RS485 bus in accordance with the manufacturer.
Connecting inverters to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
self-made, shielded 3 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
It is connected to the inverter as shown in the following diagram. It is
connected to the inverter as shown in the following diagram. The
inverters are terminated on pin 9/10 of J1. Both the first and also the
last inverter must be terminated.
Connecting the inverters
Albatech APL Trifase 15 / 20
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 131 of 374
Procedure
1. Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19.
2. Unscrew the side cover as shown in the inverter's instructions.
3. Pull the free wires through the wire opening in the inverter.
4. If you have made the cable connection yourself, connect the
wires as shown in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter terminal strip
Terminal PIN
1 (Data +) 15 (RS485 +)
3 (Ground) 17 (Ground)
4 (Data -) 16 (RS485 -)
5. Connect data cable to RS485+, RS485- and grounded
terminals.
6. If only one inverter is to be connected this must be terminated.
7. To terminate set the jumper at J1 to pins 9 and 10.
8. Screw the inverter cover on again.
9. Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting inverters to each other
(Solar-Log500, Solar-Log1000)
The wiring is done using a
self-made, shielded 3 wire data cable.
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter.
Procedure
1. Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19.
2. Unscrew the side cover as shown in the inverter's instructions.
3. Connect data cable to RS485+, RS485- and grounded
terminals.
Connecting the inverters
Albatech APL Trifase 15 / 20
132 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
4. Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
5. Terminate on the first and last inverters.
6. Set the jumper at J1 to pins 9 and 10.
7. Screw the inverter cover on again.
8. Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Allocate communication addresses
Before the inverters can be detected addresses must be allocated to
them. To do this you must connect to the unit either via the Ethernet or
RS232. You will find details on this procedure in the inverter's
handbook. Now set another address (1 - 247) from the modbus
parameters for each inverter and leave the baud rate at 19200 bit/s.
Note:
When selecting inverters "APL triphase" must be selected.
Connecting the inverters
Albatech APL Monofase
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 133 of 374
4.57 Albatech APL Monofase
APL Monofase 2.0/3.0/4.0/5.0
Inverters from different Albatech model ranges (APL monophase /
triphase) cannot be mixed on an RS485 connection. The correct range
must be selected when selecting inverters.
Overview
Interface not integrated; Upgrade the Albatech RS485 interface
3 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Install the RS485 interface in the inverter
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication address
Installing the RS485 interface
Procedure
Install the RS485 interface in the inverter in accordance with the
interface card installation instructions.
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made, shielded 3 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter terminal strip
Terminal Terminal
1 Pin 2 - D+
3 Pin 3 - GND
4 Pin 1 – D-
3 If only one inverter is to be connected, it must be terminated.
Connecting the inverters
Enfinity
134 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Set the jumper on the RS485 interface card to ON.
4 Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
5 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other (Solar Log500, Solar
Log1000)
Connect using a 3 wire, shielded data cable.
Where to connect: on the upgraded RS485 interface.
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Using the data cable connect terminals "Pin 2-RS485-A (+)", "Pin 3-
GND" and "Pin 1-RS485-B (-)" of inverter 1 to the corresponding
terminals on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter.
Set the jumper on the RS485 interface card to ON.
5 Close inverters.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Setting: Using the inverter operating display.
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions.
Note:
When selecting inverters "APL monophase" must be selected.
4.58 Enfinity
Overview
Interface integrated
2 RJ11 sockets inside the inverter.
4 pin wiring
Communication address does not have to be assigned.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverters and Solar Log™.
• Connect inverters to the Solar Log™.
• Connect the inverters to each other
Connecting the inverters
Enfinity
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 135 of 374
Note concerning Solar Log1000
:
Only connect inverter using the RS485/422 B interface.
Connecting inverters to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
self-made, shielded 4 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
Where to connect: RJ11 socket on the inverter.
Procedure
Open the inverter as shown in the inverter's instructions.
1. If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as
shown in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter
RS485/422 B RJ 11 socket
1 Pin 3 – RX+
4 Pin 4- RX-
5 Pin 1 – TX+
6 Pin 2 TX-
2. Insert the RJ1plug into any RJ11 socket on inverter 1.
3. Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
4. Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™
RS485/422 B socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Wiring using the RJ11 cable
Where to connect: RJ11 sockets
Procedure
1. Open the inverter as shown in the inverter's instructions.
2. Insert the self-made cable with the RJ11 plug into any RJ11
socket on inverter 1. Connect the other end to the terminal plug
on the Solar LogTM
.
3. Insert the RJ11 cable into the second RJ11 socket on the first
inverter and into any RJ11 socket on the second inverter.
4. Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
5. Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™
RS485/422 B socket.
6. Close inverters.
Connecting the inverters
Carlo Gavazzi
136 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
4.59 Carlo Gavazzi
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: RJ45 socket on the outside of the inverter
2 pin wiring
Communication address does not have to be assigned.
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made BRJ2 data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made, shielded 2 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverters and Solar Log™; Page
• Connect inverters to the Solar Log™.
• Connect the inverters to each other
CAUTION!
Risk of damage to the unit!
The Solar Log™ also has an RJ45 socket, which must never be
connected to the RJ45 socket on the inverter.
Only connect the inverter through the RS485/422 B interface on
the Solar Log™ or to the Solar Log1000
through the RS485 A
interface.
Procedure
1. If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as
shown in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter
RS485/422 B RJ 45 socket
1 Pin 7
4 Pin 8
2. Insert the RJ45 plug into any RJ45 socket on inverter 1.
3. Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters
Omron
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 137 of 374
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a network cable (patch cable).
Where to connect: RJ45 socket on the outside of the inverter.
Procedure
1. Insert the RJ45 plug into the free RJ45 socket on the first
inverter.
2. Insert the other end of the cable into any RJ11 socket on
inverter 2.
3. Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4.60 Omron
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter
3 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverters and Solar Log™; Page
• Connect inverters to the Solar Log™.
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication address
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
self-made, shielded 3 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
Procedure
1. Open the inverter as shown in the inverter's instructions.
2. Connect the cable as shown in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter
RS485/422 B Terminal strip TB401
1 Pin 4 – Data +
3 Pin 3 – GND
4 Pin 5 – Data -
Connecting the inverters
Omron
138 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
3. If only one inverter is to be connected it must be terminated. To
do this a bridge must be inserted on the inverter between pins 9
and 10.
4. Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
5. Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
The wiring is done using a
self-made, shielded 3 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
Procedure
1. Open the inverter as shown in the inverter's instructions.
2. Connect terminals 6, 7 and 8 on inverter 1 to terminals 3, 4
and 5 on inverter 2.
3. Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4. Terminate in the last inverter.
Bridge between pins 9 and 10.
5. Close inverters.
6. Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™
RS485 socket.
Inverter settings
The following values must be set in the inverter setup:
COM_485 to 19200bps
COM_Pari to Even
COM_Stop to 2bit
Set the communication protocol to "Auto" or "Compoway/F"; not
"Modbus"
Please follow the instructions in the manufacturer's handbook for this.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Setting: Using the inverter operating display.
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions.
Inverter n Inverter n+1
Terminal strip TB401 Terminal strip TB401
6 Pin 3 – GND
7 Pin 4 – Data +
8 Pin 5 – Data -
Connecting the inverters
Samil Power
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 139 of 374
4.61 Samil Power
Overview
Interface integrated
2 RJ11 sockets inside the inverter.
4 pin wiring
Communication address does not have to be assigned.
Note concerning Solar Log1000
:
Only connect inverter using the RS485/422 B interface.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverters and Solar Log™; Page
• Connect inverters to the Solar Log™.
• Connect the inverters to each other
Connecting inverters to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
self-made, shielded 4 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
Procedure
1. Open the inverter as shown in the inverter's instructions.
2. If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as
shown in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter
SolarRiver*
Inverter SolarLake
RS485/422 B RJ 11 socket RJ45 socket
1 2 R+ 3 R+
4 1 R- 6 R-
5 4 T+ 1 T+
6 3 T- 2 T-
*Some models of SolarRiver use the same connetion as the SolarLake
inverters. In this case wire acoarding to SolarLake RJ45 specification.
Connecting the inverters
Aten
140 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Note:
The wiring above refers to the RJ45 or RJ11 socket. Page 15.
3. Insert the RJ1plug into any RJ11 socket on inverter 1.
4. Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
5. Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™
RS485/422 B socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a 4 wire, shielded data cable.
Where to connect: RJ11 sockets
Note:
A maximum of 32 inverters can be connected per RS422 bus.
Procedure
Open the inverter as shown in the inverter's instructions.
1. Insert the self-made cable with the RJ11 plug into any RJ11
socket on inverter 1.
2. Insert the RJ11 cable into the 2nd RJ11 socket on inverter 1
and into any RJ11 socket on inverter 2.
3. Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4. Close inverters.
5. Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™
RS485/422 B socket.
4.62 Aten
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: RJ14 socket on the outside of the inverter.
2 pin wiring
Communication address does not have to be assigned.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverters and Solar Log™; Page
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
Connecting the inverters
Aten
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 141 of 374
Connect inverters to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
self-made, shielded 2 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
Procedure
1. If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter
RS485/422 B RJ 14 socket
1 Pin 2 – Data +
4 Pin 4 – Data -
RJ14 socket pin allocation
2. Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
3. Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a 2 wire, shielded data cable.
Where to connect: RJ14 sockets.
Procedure
1. Open the inverter as shown in the inverter's instructions.
2. Insert the self-made cable with the RJ14 plug into any RJ14
socket on inverter 1.
3. Insert the RJ11 cable into the 2nd RJ11 socket on inverter 1
and into any RJ11 socket on inverter 2.
4. Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
5. Close inverters.
6. Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters
Pairan
142 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
4.63 Pairan
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: Round socket on inverter
2 pin wiring
Communication address does not have to be assigned.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverters and Solar Log™; Page
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
self-made cable connection with the round plug and the terminal
strip plug (Page 17).
The round plug must be obtained from the manufacturer.
Procedure
3. If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as
shown in the following diagram.
Connection socket view
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter
RS485/422 B Round socket
1 Data +
4 Data -
4. Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters
Schneider Electric Xantrex GT30E
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 143 of 374
Connecting the inverters to each other (Solar Log500, Solar
Log1000)
Connect using a 2 wire, shielded data cable.
Where to connect: Round socket on inverter.
Procedure
4. self-made cable connection with round plug and a terminal
block plug (Page 17)
5. Also connect the cable to the next inverter in round plug 1.
6. Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4.64 Schneider Electric Xantrex GT30E
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: Sub D 9 socket X51 inside the inverter.
2 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated to the inverter.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverters and Solar Log™; Page
• Connect inverters to the Solar Log™.
• Connect the inverters to each other
•
Connect inverters to the Solar Log™.
The wiring is done using a
ready-made data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
self-made, shielded 2 wire data cable and terminal block
connector.
Procedure:
1. Open the inverter as shown in the inverter's instructions.
2. If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as
shown in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter
RS485 A Sub D9 socket X51
1 8
4 6
3. Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
4. Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters
Schneider Electric Conext TL15000E and Conext TL20000E
144 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a 2 wire, shielded data cable.
Where to connect: Sub D 9 socket X51 inside the inverter.
Procedure
1. If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as
shown in the following diagram:
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter
RS485/422 B Sub D9 socket X51
1 8
4 6
2. Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way
(1:1).
3. Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
4. Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
4.65 Schneider Electric Conext TL15000E and Conext TL20000E
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: RJ45 socket on the outside of the inverter
3 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
Allocate communication address
Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
Connect the inverters to each other
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
self-made cable connection with RS485 data cable and terminal
block connector (Page 17).
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as shown in the inverter's instructions.
2 Insert the RJ45 plug into any RJ45 socket on the first inverter.
3 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as
shown in the following diagram.
Connecting the inverters
Eaton
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 145 of 374
4 If only one inverter is to be connected this must be terminated.
5
5 Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
6 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Caution
Risk of damage to the unit!
The Solar Log™ also has an RJ45 socket, which must never be
connected to the RJ45 socket on the inverter!
Only connect the inverter using the RS485/422 B interface
of the Solar Log™ or on the Solar Log1000
also via the
RS485 A interface.
Connecting the inverters to each other (Solar Log500
, Solar Log1000
)
Connect using a network cable (patch cable)
Where to connect: 2 RJ45 sockets
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as shown in the inverter's instructions.
2 Insert the RJ45 plug into any RJ45 socket on the first inverter.
3 Insert the other end of the wire into any RJ45 socket on inverter
2.
4 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
5 Terminate in the last inverter in accordance with the
manufacturer's specifications.
6 Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
7 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
4.66 Eaton
Overview
Interface not integrated; Retrofit RS485 interface card.
4 pin cable – only on RS485/422 B connection of the Solar
Log™
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
RJ45 inverter
Terminal PIN
1 4
3 3
4 5
Connecting the inverters
Eaton
146 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Communication address does not have to be assigned.
Multi-string technology
Eaton inverters are fitted with 1 or 3 MPP trackers depending on the
model. Each string input is monitored separately and ideally
adjusted to the connected modules.
The Solar Log™ automatically detects how many inverters and
strings are active during inverter detection.
Note
The order in which the inverters are displayed in the Solar Log™
after detection is random. We strongly recommend that you
change the order of the inverters immediately after detection at
startup, in the Configuration/Basis/Inverters dialog box (Page
236).
The inverters can be identified using the displayed serial number.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Install the RS485 interface in the inverter
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
Installing the RS485 interface
Procedure
Insert the RS485 interface in the bottom of the inverter in
accordance with the interface card installation instructions and
screw in.
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made, shielded 4 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
Note concerning Solar Log1000
:
Only connect inverter using the RS485/422 B interface.
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Pull the free wires through the wire opening in the inverter.
3 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Connecting the inverters
Ginlong
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 147 of 374
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter terminal strip
Terminal Terminal
1 R+
4 R-
5 T+
6 T-
4 If only one inverter is to be connected terminate this in accordance
with the inverter instructions.
5 Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
6 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a 4 wire, shielded data cable.
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter (on the
retrofitted RS485 interface).
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Connect terminals R+, R-, T+ and T- of inverter 1 to the
corresponding terminals on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter in accordance with the inverter
instructions.
5 Close inverters.
4.67 Ginlong
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: Between the round COM sockets on the
outside of the inverter.
2 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication address
Connecting the inverters
Ginlong
148 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made data cable (supplied with the inverter).
or
self-made, shielded 2 wire data cable with round plug and
terminal block connector (Page17).
Procedure
1 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter round socket
Terminal PIN
1 1
4 2
2 Insert the round plug into any COM round socket on the inverter.
3 If only one inverter is to be connected terminate this in accordance
with the inverter instructions.
4 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Wiring using Ginlong's daisy chain cable.
Where to connect: Between the COM round sockets on the
outside of the inverter.
Procedure
1 Insert the round plug into any round socket on inverter 1.
2 Insert the other end of the cable into any round socket on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter in accordance with the inverter
instructions.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Default settings on the inverter: Communication address 1.
Setting: Using the inverter operating display.
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions.
Connecting the inverters
Growatt
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 149 of 374
4.68 Growatt
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: Round sockets on the outside of the inverter.
2 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication address
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
self-made, shielded 2 wire data cable with round plug and
terminal block connector (Page17).
The round plugs required can be obtained from the inverter
manufacturer.
Procedure
1 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter round socket
Terminal PIN
1 2 (+)
4 1 (-)
2 Insert the round plug into any COM round socket on the inverter.
3 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Wiring using 2 pin cable with round plugs.
Where to connect: Round sockets on the outside of the inverter.
Procedure
1 Insert the round plug into any round socket on inverter 1.
2 Insert the other end of the cable into any round socket on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters
Growatt
150 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Address range: 1 - 125.
Setting: Using the inverter operating display.
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions.
Connecting the inverters
Oelmaier
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 151 of 374
Note
When detecting inverters, there are two options for for Growatt in
the initial configuration. "Growatt old" and "Growatt Mod". For
newer models and modules with the latest firmware version
version, please select "Growatt Mod", for models with older
firmware versions select "Growatt old".
Inverter Firmware
version
Sungold 1500TL/2000TL/3000TL/5000TL >= G.2.1 Modbus
Growatt 1500TL/2000TL/3000TL/4000TL/4400TL/5000TL >= G.2.1 Modbus
Growatt 2500MTL/3000MTL Modbus
Growatt 3600MTL/4200MTL/5000MTL >= S.2.1 Modbus
Growatt 3600MTL-10/4200MTL-10/5000MTL-10 Modbus
Growatt 2000HF/2500HF/3000HF Modbus
Growatt 10000UE/12000UE/18000UE/20000UE Modbus
Growatt 4000UE/5000UE/6000UE Modbus
Growatt 1500TL-US/2000TL-US/3000TL-US >= U.1.5 Modbus
Growatt 3600MTL-US/4200MTL-US/5000MTL-US >= U.1.5 Modbus
Growatt 2000HF-US/2500HF-US/3000HF-US Modbus
Growatt 8000TL-US/9000TL-US/10000TL-US/11000TL-US Modbus
Growatt 10000TL3-US/12000TL3-US/18000TL3-US/20000TL3-US Modbus
4.69 Oelmaier
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: Terminal strip behind service cover
2 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication address
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
self-made, shielded 2 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Connecting the inverters
Oelmaier
152 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Terminal strip inside the inverter
Terminal Terminal
1 A – Data +
4 B – Data -
3 Open the inverter as shown in the inverter's instructions.
4 Close inverters.
5 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Where to connect: Terminal strip behind service cover
2 pin wiring
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as shown in the inverter's instructions.
2 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Terminal strip inside the inverter
Terminal RS485 terminal
1 A – Data +
4 B – Data -
3 Connect terminals A and B on inverter 1 to the corresponding
terminals on inverter 2.
4 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
5 Terminate the inverter as shown in the inverter's instructions.
6 Close inverters.
7 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Setting: Using the solar fitter's menu on the inverter.
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions.
Connecting the inverters
AEG Protect
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 153 of 374
4.70 AEG Protect
Overview
Supported models PV 10; 12.5 and 15
Where to connect: 2 RJ45 sockets on the right on the side cover
Communication address does not have to be assigned.
4 pin wiring
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made RJ45 data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made cable connection with RS485 data cable and terminal
block connector (Page 17).
Procedure
1 Unscrew the side cover as shown in the inverter's instructions.
2 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
RJ45 inverter
Terminal PIN
1 6
3 1
3 2
4 3
Caution
Risk of damage to the unit!
The Solar Log™ also has an RJ45 socket, which must never be
connected to the RJ45 socket on the inverter!
Only connect the inverter using the RS485/422 B interface
of the Solar Log™ or on the Solar Log1000
also via the
RS485 A interface.
3 If only one inverter is to be connected it must be terminated.
Insert the connection plug into the free RJ45 socket on the inverter.
Connecting the inverters
Helios Systems
154 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
The connection plug is an 8 pin RJ45 dummy plug with bridged
wires: Wires 3 and 4 bridged and wires 5 and 6 bridged.
4 Screw the inverter cover on again.
5 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a network cable (patch cable)
Where to connect: 2 RJ45 sockets on the right on the side
cover.
Procedure
1 Unscrew the side cover as shown in the inverter's instructions.
2 Insert the RJ45 plug into any RJ45 socket on the first inverter.
3 Insert the other end of the wire into any RJ45 socket on inverter 2.
4 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
5 Terminate in the last inverter.
Insert the connection plug into the free RJ45 socket.
6 Screw the inverter cover on again.
4.71 Helios Systems
String inverter HSI 20
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: RJ45 socket on the outside of the inverter
3 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
Allocate communication address
Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
Connect the inverters to each other
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
Connecting the inverters
Helios Systems
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 155 of 374
self-made cable connection with RS485 data cable and terminal
block connector (Page 17).
Procedure
7 Open the inverter as shown in the inverter's instructions.
8 Insert the RJ45 plug into any RJ45 socket on the first inverter.
9 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as
shown in the following diagram.
10 W
10 If only one inverter is to be connected,
this has to be terminated.
11 Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
12 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Caution
Risk of damage to the unit!
The Solar Log™ also has an RJ45 socket, which must never be
connected to the RJ45 socket on the inverter!
Only connect the inverter using the RS485/422 B interface
of the Solar Log™ or on the Solar Log1000
also via the
RS485 A interface.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500
, Solar Log1000
)
Connect using a network cable (patch cable).
Where to connect: 2 RJ45 sockets.
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as shown in the inverter's instructions.
2 Insert the RJ45 plug into any RJ45 socket on the first inverter.
3 Insert the other end of the wire into any RJ45 socket on inverter
2.
4 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
5 Terminate in the last inverter in accordance with the
manufacturer's specifications.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
RJ45 inverter
Terminal PIN
1 4
3 3
4 5
Connecting the inverters
4.68 PV Powered – central inverter RS485
156 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
6 Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
7 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Central inverter
Overview
Interface integrated
Connected using network cable (patch cable) and Ethernet
router or switch
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Allocate communication address
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
Caution
The IP addresses for the inverter must be in the same Class C
network as the Solar Log™. Alternatively, it is sufficient if the first
three groups of digits in the IP addresses are the same.
Allocate communication address
Setting: Using the inverter operating display.
Please follow the instructions in the manufacturer's manual.
Connecting inverters and the Solar-Log™
The wiring is done using a
network cable (patch cable) and the
Ethernet router or switch.
Procedure
1 Set different unit IPs on each inverter in accordance with the
inverter's instructions.
2 Connect the Solar Log™ and the inverter to the router or switch.
4.72 4.68 PV Powered – central inverter RS485
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: Modbus Slave socket on interface card
3 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Connecting the inverters
4.68
PV Powered – central inverter RS485
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 157 of 374
Installation steps
Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
Set the address of the inverters.
Connect the inverters to each other
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
self-made 3 pin connection cable and terminal block connector
(Page 17).
Note
The transfer rate for Modbus (RS485) on delivery to the customer
is set to 9600bps. Please check these settings.
Procedure
1. Open the inverter as shown in the inverter's instructions.
2. Pull the free wires through the wire opening in the inverter.
3. If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as
shown in the following diagram.
4. If only one inverter is to be connected this must be terminated.
Inside the inverter set the supplied jumper from "J4" to "J5".
5. Setting the address for the inverter: Set SW1 to "0" and SW2 to
"1" in order to set the parameters for the inverter with the
address "01".
6. Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
7. Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
RJ45 inverter
Terminal PIN
1 2 - D+
3 1 – GND
4 3 – D-
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
The wiring is done using a self-made cable connection and
terminal block connector.
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter.
Connecting the inverters
PV Powered string inverter
158 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as shown in the inverter's instructions.
2 Pull the free wires through the wire opening in the inverter.
3 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as
shown in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
RJ45 inverter
Terminal PIN
1 2 - D+
3 1 – GND
4 3 – D-
4 Connect terminals GND, D+ and D- of inverter 1 to the
corresponding terminals on inverter 2.
5 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
6 Terminate in the last inverter in accordance with the
manufacturer's specifications.
Inside the inverter set the supplied jumper from "J4" to "J5"
7 Address the individual inverters in accordance with the
manufacturer's handbook: Inverter 1 should be the inverter that
is directly connected to the Solar-Log™. To this end, set SW1
to "0". Depending on the position of the inverter in the bus,
SW2 should be set to 1-9.
If more than 9 inverters are to be connected to one Solar
Log™, please read the manufacturer's instructions for further
information.
8 Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
9 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
4.73 PV Powered string inverter
Overview
Interface integrated
Connected using network cable (patch cable) and Ethernet
router or switch
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Allocate communication address
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Connecting the inverters
Valenia
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 159 of 374
Setting: Using the inverter operating display.
Procedure: Before connecting to the Ethernet router or switch
and allocating the IP address.
Connecting inverters and the Solar-Log™
The wiring is done using a
network cable (patch cable) and the
Ethernet router or switch.
Procedure
1 Set different unit IDs on each inverter in accordance with the
inverter's instructions.
2 Connect the Solar Log™ and the inverter to the router or switch.
4.74 Valenia
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: Terminal strip on internal interface card
3 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
Switch off the inverters and the Solar Log™; Page 19
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
Connect the inverters to each other
Set the address of the inverters.
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
self-made 3 pin connection cable and terminal block connector
(Page 17).
Procedure
1. Open the inverter as shown in the inverter's instructions.
2. If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as
shown in the following diagram.
3. If only one inverter is to be connected, according to the
manufacturer's handbook it must be terminated.
4. Set the address for the inverter on the inverter itself.
5. Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
Connecting the inverters
Valenia
160 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
6. Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter terminal strip
Terminal Terminal
1 P
3 0 V
4 N
Note
The inverter terminal strip's 5V output must not be connected to
the Solar Log™.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
The wiring is done using a self-made cable connection and
terminal block connector.
Where to connect: Terminal strip on internal interface card.
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as shown in the inverter's instructions.
2 Connect terminals P, N and 0V of the first inverter 1 to the
corresponding terminals on the next inverter.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter in accordance with the
manufacturer's specifications.
5 Address the individual inverters in accordance with the
manufacturer's manual.
6 Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
7 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters
Chint Power (CSP SC and CSP SCE to 20k)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 161 of 374
4.75 Chint Power (CSP SC and CSP SCE to 20k)
Overview
Interface not integrated; Retrofit RS485 interface card.
Where to connect: RJ45 socket on the outside of the inverter
4 pin cable – only on RS485/422 B connection of the Solar
Log™
Communication address does not have to be assigned.
Note
The order in which the inverters are displayed in the Solar Log™
after detection is random. We strongly recommend that you change
the order of the inverters immediately after detection at startup, in
the Configuration/Basis/Inverters dialog box (Page 236).
The inverters can be identified using the displayed serial number.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Install the RS485 interface in the inverter
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
During the Initial configuration for these inverter Chint <20k must be
selected.
Installing the RS485 interface
Procedure
Insert the RS485 interface in the bottom of the inverter in
accordance with the interface card installation instructions and
screw in.
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made BRJ1 data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made cable connection with RS485 data cable and terminal
block connector (Page 17)
Procedure
Connecting the inverters
Chint Power (CSP SC and CSP SCE to 20k)
162 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Caution
Risk of damage to the unit!
The Solar Log™ also has an RJ45 socket, which must never be
connected to the RJ45 socket on the inverter!
Only connect inverters via the RS485/422 B-Solar Log™
interface.
Note concerning Solar-Log1000
:
Only connect inverter using the RS485/422 B interface.
1 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
RJ45 inverter
Terminal PIN
1 Pin 3
4 Pin 6
5 Pin 1
6 Pin 2
2 Insert the RJ45 plug into any RJ45 socket on the first inverter.
3 If only one inverter is to be connected, terminate this in accordance
with the inverter instructions.
4 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485/422
B-socket
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a network cable (patch cable).
Where to connect: RJ45 socket on the outside of the inverter.
Procedure
1 Insert the RJ45 plug into any RJ45 socket on the first inverter.
2 Insert the other end of the wire into any RJ45 socket on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter in accordance with the inverter
instructions.
Connecting the inverters
Chint Power (CPS 20k+)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 163 of 374
4.76 Chint Power (CPS 20k+)
Overview
Integrated interface.
Where to connect: RJ45 socket on the outside of the inverter.
2-pin wiring.
The communication addresses (1-32) have to be assigned.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar-Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar-Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
During the Initial configuration for these inverter Chint CPS20k+ must
be selected.
Connect the inverter to the Solar-Log™
The wiring is done using a
self-made cable connection with RS485 data cable and terminal
block connector (Page 17).
Procedure
Caution
Risk of damage to the unit!
The Solar-Log™ also has an RJ45 socket, which must never be
connected to the RJ45 socket on the inverter!
Connect the inverter to the Solar-Log™ via the RS485
interface.
1 Connect wires as shown in the diagram below:
Solar-Log™ terminal block connector
RJ45 inverter
Terminal PIN
1 1-485+
4 3-485-
2 Insert the RJ45 plug into any RJ45 socket on the first inverter.
3 If only one inverter is to be connected terminate this in accordance
with the inverter instructions.
4 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar-Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters
Chint Power Modbus
164 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar-Log500, Solar-Log1000)
Connect using a network cable (patch cable).
Connect to the RJ45 socket on the outside of the inverter.
Procedure
1. Insert the RJ45 plug into any RJ45 socket on inverter 1.
2. Insert the other end of the wire into any RJ45 socket on inverter
2.
3. Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4. Terminate in the last inverter in accordance with the inverter
instructions.
5. Allocate communication address.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Address range: 1 - 32.
Setting: Use the inverter's operating display.
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions.
4.77 Chint Power Modbus
The following types have to be connected according to this scheme:
CPS SCA5KTL-DO
CPS SCA6KTL-DO
CPS SCA7KTL-DO
CPS SCA8KTL-DO
CPS SCA10KTL-DO
CPS SCA12KTL-DO
CPS SCA8KTL-DO/HE
CPS SCA10KTL-DO/HE
CPS SCA12KTL-DO/HE
During the Initial configuration for these inverter Chint-Mod must be selected.
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: RJ45 socket on the outside of the inverter
2 pin wiring
Communication address (1-247) must be allocated.
Connecting the inverters
Chint Power Modbus
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 165 of 374
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication address
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
self-made cable connection with RS485 data cable and terminal
block connector (Page 17).
Caution
Risk of damage to the unit!
The Solar Log™ also has an RJ45 socket, which must never be
connected to the RJ45 socket on the inverter!
Only connect the inverter using the RS485/422 B interface
of the Solar Log™ or on the Solar-Log1000
also via the
RS485 A interface.
Procedure
If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown in
the following diagram.
Klemmleistenstecker Solar-Log™
RJ 45 Stecker
Klemme Pin
1 1 (+)
4 3 (-)
Insert the RJ45 plug into the RJ45 socket on the inverter.
The inverter must be terminated here.
Insert the 120 Ω resistor into the free RJ45 socket.
Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485 socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a network cable (patch cable).
Where to connect: RJ45 sockets on the outside of the inverter.
Procedure
Insert the RJ45 plug into any RJ45 socket on the first inverter.
Insert the other end of the wire into any RJ45 socket on the second
inverter.
Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
Terminate in the last inverter.
Insert the 120 Ω resistor into the free RJ45 socket
Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485 socket.
Connecting the inverters
KLNE (Solartec and Sunteams)
166 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Adress range from 1 to 247
Setting: Using the inverter operating display.
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions.
4.78 KLNE (Solartec and Sunteams)
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: 4 pin round socket on the button of the device
2 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication addresses
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
self-made cable connection with terminal block connector
(Page 17).
Where to connect: 4 pin round socket on the button of the
device.
Procedure
1 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
X4 socket inverter
Terminal PIN
1 4 - Data+
4 2 - Data-
Connecting the inverters
ABB
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 167 of 374
2 If only one inverter is to be connected terminate this in accordance
with the inverter instructions.
3 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Where to connect: 4 pin round socket on the button of the device
Procedure
1 Unscrew the side cover as shown in the inverter's instructions.
2 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
X4 socket inverter
Terminal PIN
1 4 - Data+
4 2 - Data-
3 Connect the Solar Log™ cable to socket A on the first inverter.
4 According to the same wiring diagram, connect socket B on the first
inverter to socket A on the second inverter using the following
diagram.
X4 socket inverter 1 X4 socket inverter 2
PIN PIN
2 2 - Data-
4 4 - Data+
5 Connect additional inverters to each other in the same way.
6 Terminate the last inverter in accordance with the inverter
instructions.
7 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Note
According to the manufacturer's specifications, a maximum of 31 devices can
be connected per RS485 bus.
4.79 ABB
Overview
Where to connect: X4 socket under the cover
Connecting the inverters
ABB
168 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Communication address must be allocated.
3 pin wiring
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
self-made cable connection with terminal block connector
(Page 17).
Procedure
1 Unscrew the side cover as shown in the inverter's instructions.
2 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
X4 socket inverter
Terminal PIN
1 1 - Data+
3 3 - GND
4 2 - Data-
3 If only one inverter is to be connected, according to the
manufacturer's handbook it must be terminated.
4 Screw the inverter cover on again.
5 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Where to connect: 2 RJ45 sockets on the right on the side
cover.
Procedure
1 Unscrew the side cover as shown in the inverter's instructions.
2 Insert the RJ45 plug into any RJ45 socket on the first inverter.
Connecting the inverters
ABB
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 169 of 374
3 Insert the other end of the wire into any RJ45 socket on inverter 2.
4 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
5 Terminate in the last inverter.
Insert the connection plug into the free RJ45 socket.
6 Screw the inverter cover on again.
Connecting the inverters
ABB-Central Inverter
170 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
4.75 ABB-Central Inverter
Overview
Interface not Integrated; Components (having identification
„RETA-01“) upgrade
Cable connection of network cable (patch cable) and Ethernet -
Router or Switch
Communication address must be assigned.
Working steps
• Communication address is assigned
• Inverter is connected to Solar-Log™
• Inverter is connected all together
Communication address assignment
Recommended: Consecutive numbering, beginning with 1 in the
address range from 1-254
Setting: over operators display from inverters
To proceed: Before connecting to Ethernet - Router or Switch
award the assigned IP-Address
Inverter and Solar-Log™ connection
The cable connection is done via
Network cable (patch cable) and
Ethernet - Router or Switch
Procedure
1 On every inverter use the different equipment ID number as
assigned from the user-manual
2 Solar-Log™ and inverter are connected to router or switch
3 Every inverter is assigned an IP address. The user-manual for the
inverter will provide further details to the IP address
The first 3 number blocks for e.g. Solar-Log™, e.g.192.168.178.49
4th
block: a free place for network e.g. 192.168.178.50
Connecting the inverters
Riverberi (EDI Series)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 171 of 374
4.76 Riverberi (EDI Series)
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter
2 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect inverters to the Solar Log™.
• Allocate communication address
• Terminate inverter
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made data cable (optional extra; not supplied).
Procedure:
Open the inverter as shown in the inverter's instructions.
Pull the free wires through the wire opening in the inverter.
If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown in
the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Tterminal strip inverter
Terminal PIN
1 5
1 7
4 4
4 6
If only one inverter is to be connected this must be terminated.
Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485 socket.
Connecting inverters to each other (Solar Log500,Solar Log1000)
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter
2 pin wiring
Connecting the inverters
GESOLAR
172 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Procedure
Open the inverter as shown in the inverter's instructions.
Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
Terminate in the last inverter.
Close inverters.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering from Solar Log™, starting
from 2 (not 1!). Last address at 247.
Setting: Using the inverter operating display
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions
4.77 GESOLAR
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: RJ45 plug outside the housing floor.
2 pin wiring
Communication address does not have to be assigned.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made BRJ2 data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made cable connection with RS485 data cable and terminal
block connector (Page 17).
Caution
Risk of damage to the unit!
The Solar Log™ also has an RJ45 socket, which must never be
connected to the RJ45 socket on the inverter!
Only connect the inverter using the RS485/422 B interface
of the Solar Log™ or on the Solar Log1000
also via the
RS485 A interface.
Connecting the inverters
GESOLAR
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 173 of 374
Procedure
1 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
RJ45 inverter
Terminal PIN
1 7
4 8
2 Insert the RJ45 plug into the RJ45 socket on the inverter.
3 If only one inverter is to be connected terminate this in accordance
with the inverter instructions.
4 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a network cable (patch cable).
Where to connect: RJ45 sockets on the outside of the inverter.
Procedure
1 Insert the RJ45 plug into any RJ45 socket on the first inverter.
2 Insert the other end of the wire into any RJ45 socket on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter in accordance with the inverter
instructions.
Connecting the inverters
Trannergy
174 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
4.78 Trannergy
Overview
Interface not integrated; Retrofit RS485 interface card.
4 pin cable – only on RS485/422 B connection of the Solar
Log™
Communication address does not have to be assigned.
Multi-string technology
The Trannergy inverters are fitted with 1 or 3 MPP trackers
depending on the model. Each string input is monitored separately
and ideally adjusted to the connected modules.
The Solar Log™ automatically detects how many inverters and
strings are active during inverter detection.
Note
The order in which the inverters are displayed in the Solar Log™
after detection is random. We strongly recommend that you
change the order of the inverters immediately after detection at
startup, in the Configuration/Basis/Inverters dialog box (Page
236).
The inverters can be identified using the displayed serial number.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Install the RS485 interface in the inverter
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
Installing the RS485 interface
Procedure
Insert the RS485 interface in the bottom of the inverter in
accordance with the interface card installation instructions and
screw in.
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made, shielded 4 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
Note concerning Solar-Log1000
:
Only connect inverter using the RS485/422 B interface.
Connecting the inverters
Trannergy
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 175 of 374
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Pull the free wires through the wire opening in the inverter.
3 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter terminal strip
Terminal Terminal
1 R+
4 R-
5 T+
6 T-
4 If only one inverter is to be connected terminate this in accordance
with the inverter instructions.
5 Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
6 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a 4 wire, shielded data cable.
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter (on the
retrofitted RS485 interface).
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Connect terminals R+, R-, T+ and T- of inverter 1 to the
corresponding terminals on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Terminate in the last inverter in accordance with the inverter
instructions.
5 Close inverters.
Connecting the inverters
ZSD GmbH - zentralpower
176 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
4.79 ZSD GmbH - zentralpower
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: RJ45 socket on the outside of the inverter
2 pin wiring
The communication addresses (1-247) have to be assigned.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication address
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
self-made, shielded 2 wire data cable with a RJ45 socket and a
terminal block connector (Page17).
Procedure
1 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
RJ 45 socket
Terminal PIN
1 4 (+)
4 3 (-)
2 Insert the RJ45 plug into the RJ45 socket on the inverter.
3 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Wiring using 2 pin cable with round plugs.
Where to connect: Round sockets on the outside of the inverter.
Procedure
1 Insert the RJ45 plug into the RJ45 socket on the first inverter.
2 Insert the other end of the wire into any RJ45 socket on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters
Solar Edge
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 177 of 374
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Address range: 1 - 247.
Setting: Using the inverter operating display
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions.
4.80 Solar Edge
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter
Communication address must be allocated.
3 pin wiring
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
• Address inverter and set protocol
• Connect the inverters to each other
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
self-made cable connection with terminal block connector
(Page 17).
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Pull the free wires through the wire opening in the inverter.
3 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
X4 socket RS485-1 inverter
Terminal PIN
1 A - Data+
3 G - GND
4 B - Data-
4 If only one inverter is to be connected, it must be terminated with
DIP switch SW6 according to the manufacturer's instructions.
5 Screw the inverter cover on again.
Connecting the inverters
Solar Edge
178 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
6 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter.
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Pull the free wires through the wire opening in the inverter.
3 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
X4 socket RS485-2
Inverter n
X4 socket RS485-1 inverter +1
PIN PIN
A - Data+ A - Data+
G - GND G - GND
B - Data- B - Data-
2 Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
3 Terminate the last inverter with DIP switch SW6 according to the
manufacturer's instructions.
4 Screw the inverter cover on again.
7 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1;
highest possible address: 247.
Setting: Using the inverter operating display.
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions.
Inverter settings
Two settings need to be checked on the inverter's control panel and
changed if needed before performing the inverter detection.
1. Non-SE Logger needs to be set in the menu Communication //
Device Type.
2. SunSpec needs to be activated in the menu Communication //
Protocol.
Connecting the inverters
Eltek
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 179 of 374
4.81 Eltek
Overview
Integrated interface
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter
2-pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar-Log™ (Page 19)
• Connect the inverter to the Solar-Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Configure the inverter's communication interface
• Allocate communication address
Connect the inverter to the Solar-Log™
The wiring is done using a
self-made, shielded 2 wire data cable and terminal block
connector (Page17).
Procedure
1 Connect wires as shown in the diagram below:
Solar-Log™ terminal block connector
Inverter terminal strip
Terminal Terminal
1 B (Data +)
4 A (Data -)
2 If only one inverter is to be connected, terminate this in accordance
with the inverter instructions.
3 Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
4 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar-Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar-Log500, Solar-Log1000)
Connect the inverters to each other
via the RS485 interface. The set up for the connections is explained in
the inverter manufacturer's manual.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Connecting the inverters
Eltek
180 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Setting: Using the inverter operating display.
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions.
Subsequent configuration
Activate the RS485 interface via the inverter's operating display.
Note
Pay particular attention to the instructions in the installation manual regarding
the address types, activating the communication interface and the
master/slave mode.
Connecting the inverters
GMDE
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 181 of 374
4.82 GMDE
Overview
Integrated RS485 interface
8-pin cable for the RS485 connection of the Solar-Log™
Communication address does not have to be assigned
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar-Log™ (Page 19)
• Connect the inverter to the Solar-Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
Connect the inverter to the Solar-Log™
The wiring is done using a
partially ready-made RJ45 cable (not included)
or
self-made data cable with RJ45 plug and 6-pin terminal block
connector (Page 17)
Caution
Risk of damage to the unit!
The Solar-Log™ also has an RJ45 socket, which must never be connected to
the RJ45 socket on the inverter!
Only connect the inverter using the RS485/422 B interface of the
Solar-Log™ or on the Solar-Log1000
also via the RS485 A
interface.
Procedure
1 Connect wires as shown in the diagram below:
Solar-Log™ terminal block connector
RJ45 inverter
Terminal PIN
1 (Data+) A 3 A
4 (Data-) B 6 B
Run the wire from the Solar-Log™ to inverter 1 through the hole for
the wire on the bottom of the unit.
In the inverter, insert the RJ45 plug into the "RS-485 out" socket.
4 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar-Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters
GMDE
182 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Connecting the inverters to each other (Solar-Log500, Solar-
Log1000)
Connect using a network cable (patch cable)
Where to connect: RJ45 socket on the outside of the inverter
Procedure
1 Insert the RJ45 plug in inverter 1 into the OUT socket.
2 Insert the other end of the wire into any RJ45 socket on inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other the same way.
4 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar-Log™ RS485
socket.
Terminate in the last inverter in accordance with the inverter
instructions.
Connecting the inverters
GoodWe
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 183 of 374
4.83 GoodWe
Overview
Integrated RS422 interface
8-pin cable – only on RS485/422 B connection of the Solar-
Log™
Communication address does not have to be assigned
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar-Log™ (Page 19)
• Connect the inverter to the Solar-Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
Connect the inverter to the Solar-Log™
The wiring is done using a
partially ready-made RJ45 cable (not included)
or
self-made data cable with RJ45 plug and 6-pin terminal block
connector (Page 17)
Caution
Risk of damage to the unit!
The Solar-Log™ also has an RJ45 socket, which must never be connected to
the RJ45 socket on the inverter!
Only connect the inverter using the RS485/422 B interface of the
Solar-Log™ or on the Solar-Log1000
also via the RS485 A
interface.
Procedure
1 Connect wires as shown in the diagram below:
Solar-Log™ terminal block connector
RJ45 inverter
Terminal PIN
1 6 Data+ (TX)
3 4 GND
3 5 GND
4 3 Data- (TX)
5 8 Data+ (RX)
6 7 Data- (RX)
2 Run the wire from the Solar-Log™ to inverter 1 through the hole for
the wire on the bottom of the unit.
Connecting the inverters
GoodWe
184 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
3 In the inverter, insert the RJ45 plug into the "RS-485 out" socket.
4 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar-Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters
GoodWe
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 185 of 374
Connecting the inverters to each other (Solar-Log500, Solar-
Log1000)
Connect using a network cable (patch cable)
Where to connect: RJ45 socket on the outside of the inverter
Procedure
1 Insert the RJ45 plug in inverter 1 into the RJ45 socket.
2 Insert the other end of the wire into the other RJ45 socket on
inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other the same way.
4 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar-Log™ RS485/422
B-socket
Terminate in the last inverter in accordance with the inverter
instructions.
Connecting the inverters
CyberPower
186 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
4.84 CyberPower
Overview
Integrated RS485 interface
8-pin cable for the RS485 connection of the Solar-Log™
The communication addresses (1-247) have to be assigned.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar-Log™ (Page 19)
• Connect the inverter to the Solar-Log™
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Allocate communication address
Connect the inverter to the Solar-Log™
The wiring is done using a
partially ready-made RJ45 cable (not included)
or
self-made data cable with RJ45 plug and 6-pin terminal block
connector (Page 17)
Caution
Risk of damage to the unit!
The Solar-Log™ also has an RJ45 socket, which must never be connected to
the RJ45 socket on the inverter!
Only connect the inverter using the RS485/422 B interface of the
Solar-Log™ or on the Solar-Log1000
also via the RS485 A
interface.
Procedure
1 Connect wires as shown in the diagram below:
Solar-Log™ terminal block connector
RJ45 inverter
Terminal PIN
1 (Data+) A 3 RS485 A
4 (Data-) B 4 RS485 B
2 Run the wire from the Solar-Log™ to inverter 1 through the hole for
the wire on the bottom of the unit.
3 In the inverter insert the RJ45 plug into the "RS-485 out" socket.
4 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar-Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters
Yaskawa
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 187 of 374
Connecting the inverters to each other (Solar-Log500, Solar-
Log1000)
Connect using a network cable (patch cable)
Where to connect: RJ45 socket on the outside of the inverter
Procedure
1 Insert the RJ45 plug in inverter 1 into the RJ45 socket.
2 Insert the other end of the wire into the other RJ45 socket on
inverter 2.
3 Connect the other inverters to each other the same way.
4 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar-Log™ RS485
socket.
5 Terminate in the last inverter in accordance with the inverter
instructions.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Address range: 1 - 247.
Setting: Using the inverter operating display.
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions.
4.85 Yaskawa
Overview
Integrated interface
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter
Communication address must be allocated.
3-pin wiring
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar-Log™; (Page 19)
• Connect the inverter to the Solar-Log™
• Set the inverter address
• Connect the inverters to each other
• Terminate the inverter as shown in the inverter's instructions
Connect the inverter to the Solar-Log™
The wiring is done using a
Connecting the inverters
Yaskawa
188 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
self-made cable connection with terminal block connector
(Page 17).
Procedure
1 Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
2 Pull the free wires through the wire opening in the inverter.
3 If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown
in the following diagram.
Note
The pin designation (e.g. 2-6) refers to terminal block row 2, pin 6.
Solar-Log™ terminal block connector
RS485 Inverter
Terminal PIN
1-Data+ (A) 2-6 D+
3-GND 1-8 GND
4-Data- (B) 2-7 D-
4 If only one inverter is to be connected, terminate this in accordance
with the inverter instructions.
5 Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected
6 Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar-Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar-Log500, Solar-Log1000)
An RS485 interface is required to connect inverters to each other. The
configuration of the connections is explained in the inverter
manufacturer's manual.
Allocate communication address
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1;
highest possible address: 247
Setting: Using the inverter operating display
Procedure: As set out in the inverter's instructions
Note
Pay particular attention to the notes in the manufacturer's installation manual
in regard to assigning addresses
Connecting the inverters
G-Tec
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 189 of 374
4.86 G-Tec
Overview
RS485 interface not integrated; has to be retrofitted
Where to connect: RJ45 socket on the outside of the inverter
5 wire cabling with 6 pin terminal block connector
Communication adress does not need to be allocated
Note
The order in which the inverters are displayed in the Solar Log™
after detection is random. We strongly recommend that you
change the order of the inverters immediately after detection at
startup, in the Configuration/Basis/Inverters dialog box (Page
236).
The inverters can be identified using the displayed serial number.
Procedure
Installation steps
Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
Connect the inverters to each other
Installing the RS485 interface
Procedure
Install the RS485 interface in the inverter in accordance with the
interface card installation instructions.
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
ready-made BRJ1 data cable (optional extra; not supplied)
or
self-made cable connection with RS485 data cable and terminal
block connector (Page 17).
Caution
Risk of damage to the unit!
The Solar Log™ also has an RJ45 socket, which must never be
connected to the RJ45 socket on the inverter!
Only connect inverters via the RS485/422 B Solar Log™
interface.
Procedure
Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
Connecting the inverters
G-Tec
190 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown in
the following diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
RJ45 Inverter
Terminal Pin
1 Rx+
3 GND
4 Rx-
5 Tx+
6 Tx-
Insert the RJ45 plug into any RJ45 socket on the first inverter.
If only one inverter is to be connected terminate this in accordance with
the inverter instructions.
Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected
Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485/422 B
socket
Connecting the inverters to each other
(Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Connect using a network cable (patch cable).
Where to connect: RJ45 socket outside the inverter.
Procedure
Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
Insert the RJ45 plug into any RJ45 socket on the first inverter.
Insert the other end of the wire into any RJ45 socket on inverter 2.
Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
Terminate in the last inverter in accordance with the inverter
instructions.
Close inverters.
Connecting the inverters
Huawei
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 191 of 374
4.87 Huawei
Overview
Interface integrated
Where to connect: RJ45 socket on the outside of the inverter
2 pin wiring
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
Allocate communication address
Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
Connect the inverters to each other
Connect the inverter to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
self-made cable connection with RS485 data cable and terminal
block connector (Page 17).
Procedure
Insert the RJ45 plug into any RJ45 socket on the first inverter.
If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as shown in
the following diagram.
If only one inverter is to be connected it has to be terminated.
Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485 socket.
Caution
Risk of damage to the unit!
The Solar Log™ also has an RJ45 socket, which must never be
connected to the RJ45 socket on the inverter!
Only connect the inverter using the RS485/422 B interface
of the Solar Log™ or on the Solar Log1000
also via the
RS485 A interface.
Connecting the inverters to each other (Solar Log500
, Solar Log1000
)
Connect using a network cable (patch cable)
Where to connect: 2 RJ45 sockets
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
RJ45 inverter
Terminal PIN
1 1 or 4
4 2 or 5
Connecting the inverters
Solectria
192 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Procedure
Insert the RJ45 plug into any RJ45 socket on the first inverter.
Insert the other end of the wire into any RJ45 socket on inverter 2.
Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
Terminate in the last inverter in accordance with the manufacturer's
specifications.
Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485 socket.
4.88 Solectria
These instructions are valid for the types following:
PVI 10KW
PVI 13KW
PVI 15KW
Overview
Interface integrated.
Where to connect: Terminal strip inside the inverter.
3 pin wiring.
Communication address must be allocated.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar-Log™.
• Connect the inverter and the Solar-Log™.
• Connecting the inverters to each other.
• Assign each inverter a communication address in a range from
1 to 16. Each address can only be assigned once.
Connect the inverter to the Solar-Log™
The wiring is done using a
prefabricated data cable (optional extra; not supplied).
a self-made, shielded, twisted pair data cable and terminal
block connector.
Connecting the inverters
Solectria
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 193 of 374
Procedure
Open the inverter as described in the inverter instructions.
Solar-Log™ terminal block connector
Terminal strip inside the inverter
Terminal Pin
1 (Data+) RS 485 A
3 (Ground) RS 485 G
4 (Data-) RS 485 B
Pull the free wires through the wire opening in the inverter.
If you are fabricating the cable yourself, connect the wires as
shown in the following diagram.
Even if only one inverter is to be connected it must be
terminated.
Close the inverter if no other inverters are to be connected.
Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
Connecting the inverters to each other (Solar-Log500,
Solar-Log1000)
Connect using a twisted pair, shielded data cable.
Connect point: Terminal strip inside the inverter.
Procedure
If you are making the cable yourself, connect the wires as
shown.
Connect the cables to the other inverters according to
manufacturer specifications.
Terminate the last inverter.
Insert the terminal block connector into the Solar Log™ RS485
socket.
The RS485 connections on the terminal strip are each double connections so
that the wiring can be continued to the next inverter.
Procedure
1. Connect the data cable to the free terminals A, B and G of inverter 1.
Connecting the inverters
Solectria
194 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
2. Insert the other end of the cable into terminals A, B and G of inverter
2.
3. Connect the other inverters to each other in the same way.
4. Terminate the last inverter:
5. Close inverters.
Allocate communication addresses
Recommendation: Continuous numbering starting with 1.
Settings: Using the inverter operating display.
Procedure: As set out in the inverter manufacturer’s
instructions.
Connecting accessories
Analog modem package (Solar Log1000)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 195 of 374
5 Connecting accessories
5.1 Analog modem package (Solar Log1000)
The analog modem comes in two versions:
Home analog modem
Industrial analog modem
An analog telephone connection is required to operate the modem. This
is commonly available, along with ISDN technology, in the telephone
system or through a router.
For the data connection to the Internet, Solar Log1000
establishes an
Internet-by-call connection. Some telephone systems have blocks that
prevent this kind of dial-up access.
If the Solar Log1000
dial-up function is to be used, the corresponding
telephone number must be assigned to the telephone socket used.
Before connecting the analog modem package, the connection should
be tested by making incoming and outgoing telephone calls from an
analog telephone.
Contents of Solar Log1000 modem package
Serial RS232 cable
Telephone connecting cable
Power supply unit
Connection
1 Connect the modem to the RS232 connection on the Solar Log1000
using the serial RS232 cable
2 Connect the modem to the TAE telephone socket using the
telephone cable.
3 Plug the power supply unit into the modem and switch on the
modem.
All other settings are configured through the Solar Log1000
display. A PC
is not necessary.
Connecting accessories
Mobile phone package (Solar Log1000)
196 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
5.2 Mobile phone package (Solar Log1000)
The mobile phone package connects the Solar Log1000
to the Internet
through the mobile phone network.
In addition to the mobile phone package, a SIM card from the desired
mobile service provider is required (this is not included in the package).
Connection
Insert the SIM card in the modem:
1 Push the cover on the top of the modem in the direction of the arrow
2 Insert the SIM card in the slot located under the cover
Please read the related instructions supplied with the modem..
3 Screw the external antenna into the modem
Find a suitable position with good reception quality for the magnetic
base antenna. If necessary, check the reception first with a mobile
phone. Good reception is important for a reliable data connection.
4 Connect the modem to the Solar Log1000
using the serial RS232
cable
5 Plug the RJ11 connector of the power supply unit into the modem
All other settings are configured through the Solar Log™ display. A PC
is not necessary.
Connecting accessories
Sensor Box
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 197 of 374
5.3 Sensor Box
Up to 9 MT sensor boxes can be connected to the Solar Log1000
.
The Solar Log1000
can record and save environmental data with the MT
sensor box (optional extra). This environmental data includes:
Irradiation sensor data
Module temperature
Ambient temperature (optional, sensor accessory)
Wind speed (optional, sensor accessory)
The above data form important parameters in further evaluations and
analyses to measure yield.
Notes on roof mounting
The irradiation sensor is specially designed for continuous use in
outside areas (IP65). The cables supplied for the MT sensor box are UV
and weather resistant.
Caution
Risk of damage to the unit!
Moisture ingress can cause short circuiting and can destroy the
MT Sensor Box and Solar Log1000
!
Important:
Opening the sensor is not necessary and would cause the
warranty to become void.
All components are simply screwed on.
5.3.1 Technical description
The sensor box can also be integrated in the bus wiring of the inverters.
To do this, a sensor box with version 2 hardware is required.
Note
When using inverters with RS422 communication, do not operate
the Senor Box on the same bus.
Sensor mounting
The sensor box must be fitted parallel, i.e. with the same alignment and
inclination as the modules, to a rail on the sub-frame using the fixing
Connecting accessories
Sensor Box
198 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
screws. It should be fitted in a place where there is as little
overshadowing as possible. It is not necessary to go to the trouble of
fitting a cell temperature sensor because this is integrated into the
radiation sensor.
Please note when fitting the sensor that the connection cable must be
arranged as shown in the drawing.
Module temperature sensor
Module temperature is detected by an integrated cell sensor, thus
avoiding the costly process of mounting a sensor on the back of the
module.
Fitting optional sensors
The temperature sensor must be fitted in a shady place with a wall
bracket. The connection plug is screwed firmly into the 3 pin inlet on the
radiation sensor.
As far as possible, the wind wheel should be installed in a high,
exposed position using the mounting bracket. The connection plug is
screwed firmly into the 2 pin inlet on the radiation sensor.
Cabling for the data line to the Solar Log1000
The sensor box is connected to the Solar LogTM
using the RS485
interface. The connection cable between the radiation sensor and the
Solar LogTM
has 4 wires and includes the 12 volt power supply and the
data line to the Solar LogTM
. A separate power supply unit is not
required.
The connection cable can be extended (up to 100 m). However, a 12 V
supply voltage must be provided at the end of the cable. For longer
stretches please select a larger cable cross section.
The cable must be suitably protected in outside areas (IP54). The
cabling in inside areas can consist of a shielded data cable. The cable
shielding must have an equipotential bond. The four wires in the
connection cable must be connected to the 4 pin connection plug on the
Solar Log™.
Connecting accessories
Sensor basic
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 199 of 374
Setting up (commissioning) the Solar Log™
When the Solar LogTM
is switched on, the sensor box is also powered
up automatically. Then the sensor box must be configured to the
required free RS485 interface:
1. On the screen call up Config / Start / Initial configuration. To do
this also see the installation manual Chapter 7 - Setting up
(commissioning).
2. When selecting the inverter tick MT sensor.
3. Perform inverter detection.
The sensor box is integrated into the system like an inverter.
Further configuration is done using the Solar LogTM
web interface.
5.4 Sensor basic
The Mencke & Tegtmeyer GmbH engineering practice solar radiation
sensor must be fitted in such a way that the sensor solar cell and the
solar unit modules are aligned as similarly as possible to the sun, i.e.
the sensor must have the same alignment and inclination. The position
of the sensor should be selected so that there is as little overshadowing
as possible and also so that snow in winter cannot impair the operation
of the sensor disproportionately. It is advisable to fit it on the side or
above the solar unit to achieve this. With units that are parallel to the
roof protruding fitting bars can normally be used as a fitting surface. In
other cases a suitable fitting aid may have to be acquired.
Important:
It is not necessary to open the sensor to fit it. However, if the housing is
opened no there can be no guarantee of water tightness and proper
operation.
Note
When using inverters with RS422 communication, do not operate
the Senor basic on the same bus.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Sensor Box
1 (Data+) Data+ A (Brown)
2 (+12 V) +12 V (Red)
3 (GND) GND (Black)
4 (Data-) Data B (Yellow)
Connecting accessories
Sensor basic
200 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Wiring the data line to the Solar LogTM
The connection cable has 4 wires and includes the 12 V power
supply and the data line to the Solar Log™.
No separate power supply is required.
The connection cable can be extended (up to 50 m). However,
an 8 V supply voltage at least must be provided at the end of the
cable.
The cable must also be suitably protected in outside areas. The
cable must be suitably protected in outside areas (IP54). The
cabling in inside areas can consist of a shielded data cable.
The sensor basic is connected to the Solar Log™ via the RS485
interface parallel to the inverter bus (from firmware 2.5) or via a
free RS485 interface.
The cable shielding must have an equipotential bond.
The four wires in the connection cable must be connected to the
4 pin connection plug on the Solar-Log™. The connection
assignments are printed on the back of the sensor and must be
made as follows:
Solar-Log™ terminal strip connector
Sensor basic cable
1 (Data+) Brown: Data+
2 (+12 V) Red: +12 Vdc (Vcc)
3 (GND) Black: 0 V (GND)
4 (Data-) Orange: Data-
Startup
When the Solar Log™ is switched on, the sensor box is also
powered up automatically.
Then the Sensor basic must be configured to the desired RS485
interface:
1 On the display call up Config / Start /Initial configuration or the web
interface on the Solar Log200
.
2 When selecting the inverter tick "M&T Sensor".
Carry out inverter detection. The sensor basic is integrated into the
system like an inverter.
Connecting accessories
Ripple-control receiver (only Solar Log™ PM+)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 201 of 374
5.5 Ripple-control receiver (only Solar Log™ PM+)
The Solar Log™ PM+ contains an additional 6 pin interface which
allows up to two ripple control receivers or telecontrol plants each with 4
signals to be connected.
Wiring
The relay contacts for the ripple control receiver are connected to the
Solar LogTM
via the 6 pin PM+ interface on the top side of the Solar
LogTM
.
PM+ interface on the top side of the Solar LogTM
PM+ models
Pin allocation for 6 pin terminal block connector
To ensure the highest degree of flexibility, the reduction levels specified
by the network operator, together with their signals at the ripple control
receiver, can be evaluated by the Solar LogTM
via a maximum of four
digital inputs for each.
Note
You can find examples of the cabling for ripple control receivers on our
website: www.solar-log.com/pm+
PIN Allocation Description
1 +5 V For active power control
2 D_In_1 Level 1
3 D_In_2 Level 2
4 D_In_3 Level 3
5 D_In_4 Level 4
6 +5 V For reactive power control
Connecting accessories
Ripple-control receiver (only Solar Log™ PM+)
202 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
The rest of the configuration of the feed-in management is carried out
on the web-interface of the Solar Log1000
PM+ in the
Configuration / Extended / Feed-In Management dialog box
(Page 257).
Other connections
Large display (Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 203 of 374
6 Other connections
6.1 Large display (Solar Log500, Solar Log1000)
Large displays can be connected to the Solar Log™ via two interfaces:
Connection through RS485 output
S0 pulse output
The connection through RS485 is preferable. Cable lengths can be up
to 500 m and the data can be displayed selectively on the Solar Log™.
Connection through RS485 A output
If inverters are connected and theses are using the RS422
interface (e.g. Fronius, AEG, Riello), then it is not possible to
connect a display through the bus.
If the display is looped through the same cable as the inverters, the
display must be configured accordingly in the interface parameters.
Wiring for displays made by Schneider Displaytechnik
The wiring consists of a 3 pin control cable, (3 × 0.5 mm²) and terminal
block connector (Page 17).
Terminal block connector Solar Log
500
Display
RS485A or RS485/422B terminal
1 A
3 GND
4 B
Further information about connection can be obtained from the
manufacturer of the display.
Wiring for displays from RiCo Electronic
The wiring consists of a 2 pin control cable, (2 × 0.5 mm²) and terminal
block connector (Page 17).
Terminal block connector Solar Log
1000
Display
RS485A or RS485/422B terminal
1 Pin 1: Data+
4 Pin 2: Data–
Further information about connection can be obtained from the
manufacturer of the display.
Other connections
Relay (only for Solar Log1000)
204 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Connection through S0 output
If the S0 output is used, only the current feed-in power can be
transmitted in the form of a pulse sequence. The display has to
calculate the power output and total yield by itself.
Wiring for a contact-controlled S0 output (Example: RiCo Electronic)
The wiring consists of a 2-pin shielded cable (2 x 0.6 mm²) (up to 100 m
long), and terminal block connector (Page17).
The pulse rate configuration for the Solar Log500
is located on Page
298.
For the Solar Log1000
on Page 345.
Solar Log™ S0-Out
Solar Log™ S0 In/Out terminal Display
6 S0-
5 S0+
Further information about connection can be obtained from the
manufacturer of the display.
Pulse factor
In the standard setting, Solar Log1000
sends 1000 pulses/kWh over the
S0 output. The pulse factor must be configured according to the size of
the plant (kWp):
Plant size kWp Pulse factor
30 kWp 2000
60 kWp 1000
100 kWp 600
150 kWp 400
300 kWp 200
600 kWp 100
Note that the pulse factor in the Solar Log™ must have the same
setting as the connected device.
6.2 Relay (only for Solar Log1000)
The Solar Log1000
has a potential-free control relay, which is activated if
there is an alarm or a fault.
The relay may be loaded with a maximum of 24 V DC and 5 A.
220 V consumers must be connected through another load
relay.
Other connections
External power meter
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 205 of 374
Wiring
The wiring is made through the supplied 3 pin connector;
Page17.
PIN1 and PIN2 are normally used for switching the load relay:
– In the Off state,
Pin 1-2 open
Pin 2-3 closed.
– In the ON state (alarm/fault active),
Pin 1-2 closed
Pin 2-3 open.
The relay function can be configured and tested on the Solar Log1000
display in the Config./Extended/Alarm contact dialog box
(Page 347).
6.3 External power meter
External power meters can be connected to the Solar Log™ via the S0
input as well additional power meters via the RS-485 bus.
The meter values can be displayed as:
an inverter
a feed-in meter
a consumption meter or
Utility Meter (see page 275)
(only Solar Log1000
PM+).
Note
We recommend using the meters that we have tested and offer.
We cannot guarantee the functionality of other products.
If the consumption meter option is used in connection with the 24 hour
graphic display, the Solar Log™ can determine the PV plant's own
consumption rate by comparing power consumed with power produced.
Note
From Firmware 2.8.1 Build 48, consumption meter from plant
groups can be organized.
The organization is only possible, when in (Power management)
Configuration // Extended // Power management
one of the self- consumption rules are selected.
Other connections
External power meter
206 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Wiring for S0 meter
The S0 connection on the external current meter is connected to the 6
pin S0 In/Out connector as follows.
Solar Log™ Power meter
Terminal
1 S0+
2 S0-
3 jumper
4
Wiring for Inepro 75D meter via S0
Solar Log™ Power meter
Terminal
1 S0+ - Pin 6
2 S0- - Pin 5
3 jumper
4
Wiring for Inepro 1250D meter via S0
Solar Log™ Power meter
Terminal
1 S0+ - Pin 9
2 S0- - Pin 8
3 jumper
4
The cable between the current meter and Solar LogTM
should be not
longer than 10 m.
The standard pulse factor is 1000 pulses/kWh. The value can be
changed in Config./Basic/Inverter on inverter 1 (Page 325 / 327).
Wiring for Inepro RS485 meter
The meter's RS485 output can be connected to the RS485A or
RS485/422B interface of the Solar Log™.
Note
Only one Inepro RS 485 meter can be used for each Solar Log™
interface.
]
]
]
Other connections
External power meter
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 207 of 374
Note
If possible, use one RS485 connection each for the inverter and for
the Utility Meter. This allows the control times for the inverter to be
optimized.
Note
The meter cannot be used together with inverters that are
connected to RS422 (e.g. Fronius) at the same bus input.
Overview
2 pin wiring
Communication address does not have to be assigned.
Installation steps
• Switch off the inverter and the Solar Log™; Page 19
• Connect inverters to the Solar Log™
Connect inverters to the Solar Log™
The wiring is done using a
self-made, shielded 2 wire data cable and 6 pin terminal block
connector (Page17).
Procedure
1 Connect the wires for the connecting line as shown in the following
diagram.
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Inepro 75D terminal strip
Inepro 1250D terminal strip
Utility meter terminal strip
Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal
1 8 11 22 - B
2 - -
4 7 10 23 - A
2 Insert terminal block connector into RS485A or RS485/422B socket
of the Solar Log™.
3 Carry out inverter detection. The energy meter is incorporated into
the system as if it were an inverter.
Other connections
Connection of alarm contact (Solar Log1000)
208 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
4 Assign current meter function
Please select from
-inverter mode
-total yield meter
-consumption meter or
-utility meter
If an Inepro 1250D is used the PRG button on the meter must be
pressed during detection.
If it is not possible to press the PRG button we recommend
connecting the meter to the Solar Log™ prior to installation in
order to be able to press the PRG button during detection.
In a second detection attempt the meter is then detected by the
Solar Log™ even if the PRG button is not pressed.
The Inepro meters are automatically given the mod bus address
234 by Solar Log™ during the detection process.
This address is therefore not allowed to be used for other devices.
After the configuration the display on the Inepro meters alternates
between the meter status and the address display (ID=EA); this is
how you know if Solar Log™ has made the correct detection.
6.4 Connection of alarm contact (Solar Log1000)
The Solar Log1000
has an alarm contact which is triggered if the
connection is broken. For wiring to the mounting frame or to the
modules, use a thin weather-resistant cable that breaks when strained.
The maximum cable length is around 500 m.
This function can be used to provide anti-theft protection for the
modules or inverters. It can also be used for access control by means of
a door contact switch, or for monitoring isolating switches.
An alarm message can be sent by
relay,
e-mail or
text message (SMS).
The alarm function can be configured and tested on the Solar Log1000
display in the Config./Extended/Alarm contact dialog box
(Page 347).
Other connections
Connection of alarm contact (Solar Log1000)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 209 of 374
Connection
The connection is made with a 3 pin connector.
Connect PIN1 and PIN3
The alarm is triggered if this connection is broken.
Setting Up (Commissioning)
Connecting Solar Log™ to a network / PC
210 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
7 Setting Up (Commissioning)
Before setting up, ensure that there is no damage to the power
supply. If in doubt, please contact the address indicated on the
back cover of this manual.
Before startup, check that the input voltage on the unit is the
same as the voltage supply in your country.
The unit must be operated only with the power supply unit
supplied.
The unit is intended only for installation in interior areas that are
dry and dust-free.
Attention
The Solar-Log™ needs permanent connection to the grid. In
order to avoid data loss and to secure perfect monitoring
7.1 Connecting Solar Log™ to a network / PC
The Solar Log™ is equipped with a standard Ethernet RJ45 socket,
which can be connected through any commercially available network
cable. Speeds of 10 Mbit and 100 Mbit are supported.
In general, any PC network technology can be used for connecting the
Solar Log™. The following technologies are available:
Connection through an Internet router (Ethernet RJ45 network
cable)
Direct cable connection from PC to Solar Log™
(Ethernet RJ45 network cable)
If connecting directly to a PC, the cable must be the Crossover
network cable type.
Connection through a power network (PowerLine package)
Connection through a wireless network (Solar Log™ WiFi)
If the Solar LogTM
is operated via a router, ensure that the
necessary ports ( Internet ports; Page 368) have been approved.
Since the Solar Log™ obtains its IP address while booting, it
needs to be connected to the network before being turned on.
Setting Up (Commissioning)
Connecting Solar Log™ to a network / PC
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 211 of 374
Instructions for connection through the PowerLine package
If using the Solar Log™ PowerLine package, the Solar Log™ can be
connected to the PowerLine adapter using the network cable supplied.
Next, connect the PC, switch or Internet router are connected through
the second PowerLine adapter.
The two power connectors are connected to each other automatically
and then act as power supply network cables.
The PowerLine adapters should not be connected to a multi-outlet
power strip, as other power adapters will affect the data quality.
Note
The Solar LogTM
must not be connected directly to a TNV
(Telecommunication Network Voltage) circuit.
Setting Up (Commissioning)
Initial setting up (commissioning) of Solar Log200
212 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
7.2 Initial setting up (commissioning) of Solar Log200
The Solar Log200
is configured completely through a connected PC or
laptop.
Requirements
All cables and accessories (if any) have been connected to the
Solar Log200
.
The Solar Log200
is connected to an Internet router.
The DHCP service is enabled on the Internet router.
DHCP is also enabled on the PC or laptop.
Easy Installation
From firmware version 2.4.0 the initial start up can be carried out with
the Easy Installation configuration wizard depending on the language
and country selected. However, Easy Installation can currently only be
used with certain inverters.
The Solar LogTM
then carries out the initial setting up (commissioning)
intuitively step by step.
For more information, please refer to the Quick Start Guide supplied.
Initial configuration
The initial configuration of Solar Log200
is made through a Web browser.
1 Enter the address http://solar-log in the address bar of the web
browser.
A selection of languages is displayed.
2 Select the desired language
The welcome screen then appears.
Setting Up (Commissioning)
Initial setting up (commissioning) of Solar Log200
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 213 of 374
3 On the navigation bar at the top, click on Configuration
The initial configuration window opens.
The dialog window is divided into sections that allow you to
Adjust the Date / Time
Configure the SMA-Bluetooth (only for Solar Log200
BT) and
Select the inverter on RS-485/422-B.
"Date and Time" section
In the initial configuration, the date and time must be checked and
adjusted if necessary. The Solar Log200
is pre-set at the factory.
However, the settings may be lost due to long periods of storage
without a power supply.
Setting Up (Commissioning)
Initial setting up (commissioning) of Solar Log200
214 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
To adjust the time display (Date / Time):
1 Enter the correct time in the New input box, in the same format as in
the display field above it.
2 Click on Save.
Inverter selection
On the Solar Log200
(BT), either the Bluetooth, or the RS485/422 B, or
the network interface can be selected, depending on the inverter used.
For an SMA Bluetooth inverter (available only with Solar Log200
BT):
1 In the SMA Bluetooth section, enter the serial number of the
inverter and click on Activate.
Or for inverter connection through the RS485/422 B interface:
1 In the Inverter on RS485/422-B section, select the manufacturer
from the list.
Or for inverter connection through the router:
1 In the Inverter on network section, select the manufacturer from
the list.
2 Click on Save.
As soon as the settings are saved, the Solar Log200
automatically starts detecting the inverter.
The inverter must be connected to the Solar Log200
and be
feeding into the network, so that the communication module
can operate.
Once the AC converter has been detected, LED2 on the unit starts
flashing. Depending on the inverter used, this process can take
between 5 seconds and 10 minutes.
The Solar Log is then restarted and data recording starts immediately:
LED1 and LED2 are lit.
This completes the initial configuration.
Note
If inverter detection is not completed successfully, check the cable
connection between the Solar Log200
and the inverter, and check
the related installation instructions in Section4 "Connecting the
inverters".
Setting Up (Commissioning)
Initial setting up (commissioning) of Solar Log500
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 215 of 374
7.3 Initial setting up (commissioning) of Solar Log500
The initial setting up of Solar Log500
is performed through the unit
display and using the keypad. For further details of startup and
configuration, please refer to Section9 "Solar Log500
: Configuration at
the unit", Page295.
Requirements
All cables and accessories (if any) have been connected to the
Solar Log200
.
The Solar Log200
is connected to an Internet router.
The DHCP service is enabled on the Internet router.
DHCP is also enabled on the PC or laptop.
Easy Installation
From firmware version 2.4.0 the initial start up can be carried out with
the Easy Installation configuration wizard depending on the language
and country selected. However, Easy Installation can currently only be
used with certain inverters.
The Solar LogTM
then carries out the initial setting up (commissioning)
intuitively step by step.
For more information, please refer to the Quick Start Guide supplied.
When the unit is first switched on, you will be asked to select a
language for the display and the PC controls, and to select your country
(Page 297):
1 Select the desired display language from the list.
2 Press ENTER to save.
3 Select the desired country from the list.
4 Press ENTER to save.
With "Easy Install", the next steps are completed automatically. These
are:
Automatic inverter search
To do this the inverters must be connected to the Solar
Log500
and feeding into the network so that the
communication module is working.
Internet registration – the unit must be connected to an
Internet router with automatic IP Address allocation.
If you exit "Easy Install" at this point, you can complete it at a later time:
In the menu, select Easy Install.
Setting Up (Commissioning)
Initial setting up (commissioning) of Solar Log1000
216 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Initial configuration
The other configuration steps can be performed on a PC or laptop.
These include:
Configure inverter data (Page 236)
Set the order of the inverters (Page 231)
Make the network settings if necessary (Page 222)
Enter the address http://solar-login the address bar of
the web browser.
For further details, please refer to Section8 "Configuration at a PC“,
Page 220.
7.4 Initial setting up (commissioning) of Solar Log1000
The initial startup of the Solar Log1000
is performed on the touchscreen,
after all the connections have been made and, as far as possible, the
Solar Log1000
has also been connected to the Internet router.
All settings made at the initial startup can be changed at a later time.
Easy Installation
From firmware version 2.4.0 the initial start up can be carried out with
the Easy Installation configuration wizard depending on the language
and country selected. Easy Installation can be started on initial
commissioning and carries out the initial setting up (commissioning)
intuitively step by step.
For more information, please refer to the Quick Start Guide supplied.
"Easy Installation" contains the following configuration steps:
Automatic inverter search
To do this the inverters must be connected to the Solar
Log1000
and feeding into the network so that the
communication module is working.
Internet registration – the unit must be connected to an
Internet router with automatic IP Address allocation.
If you want to exit "Easy Installation", and prefer the conventional
method.
Setting Up (Commissioning)
LED display with Easy Installation
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 217 of 374
Touch Manual installation
"Easy Installation" can also be completed at a later time.
In the menu, select Config. / Start / Easy Installation
Conventional setting up (commissioning)
The 'conventional' initial setting up (commissioning) takes you through
the following configuration points:
Language selection (Page 355)
Country settings (Page 356)
Confirmation of terms of warranty for the touchscreen display
Initial configuration (Page 311)
Inverter detection (Page 313)
7.5 LED display with Easy Installation
While the Solar LogTM
is going through the Easy Installation procedure
the relevant steps are displayed via the status LEDs 1 and 2.
Figure 12: LED status display
LED 1 Status
flashes slowly Inverter manufacturer is being
detected
flashes quickly Inverter is being detected
On Search for inverters has ended
LED 2 Status
flashes slowly DHCP server is being detected
flashes quickly Attempting Internet log in
On Internet log in successful
The red LED P indicates the presence of the power supply.
Setting Up (Commissioning)
Starting Easy Installation retroactively
218 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
LED E is not lit during normal fault-free operation..
If lit or flashing, it indicates that a malfunction has occurred (Page
357).
7.6 Starting Easy Installation retroactively
If the Easy Installation function was not used during initial operation, or one of
the installation steps was not able to be carried out correctly, you have the
option of restarting the process under Configuration / Extended / Internet.
Dialog box for restarting Easy Installation
The registration status field shows the level of completion of the process, and
when errors have arisen.
Setting Up (Commissioning)
LED status display
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 219 of 374
7.7 LED status display
After initial startup, the operating statuses of the Solar Log™ and the
inverters are shown on the status display.
On the front of the unit at the bottom left are four LEDs that show the
operating status of the unit.
Figure 13: LED status display
LED status display
Depending on the operating status, LED 1, LED 2, and LED E may
flash quickly or slowly, and may be lit steadily or switched off.
The red lit LED P indicates the presence of the power. If the P LED is
blinking, this indicates that the inverter is being controlled by the power
management.
LED E is not lit during normal fault-free operation.
If lit or flashing, it indicates that a malfunction has occurred (Page
357).
Normal operation
LED 1 LED 2 LED E Meaning
quickly quickly off Max. 5 min.: Device starts
lit slow off Synchronizing time via Internet
off quickly off Reading configuration from inverter
lit lit off Normal operation Inverter online
lit off off Normal operation Inverter offline,
e.g. at night when there is no feed-
in
Configuration at a PC
Starting configuration
220 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
8 Configuration at a PC
Solar Log™ has an integrated web server, which contains all the
software necessary for operation and configuration; no additional
software needs to be installed on the PC.
A common web browser is required on which it is possible to use
JavaScript and this option is enabled.
We recommend using the web browser "Mozilla Firefox".
To run the web browser, a network connection is required between the
PC and Solar Log™, and Solar Log™ must be up and running.
The DHCP service must be enabled on the connected router.
8.1 Starting configuration
To open the Solar Log™ main dialog window:
1 Start the web browser, enter http://solar-log in the address bar and
press the ENTER key
Alternatively you can also access the Solar LogTM
via the IP address
169.254.wx.yz. Here wxyz stand for the last 4 characters of the
Solar LogTM
serial number. If there are several Solar-LogsTM on the
network a special logger can be activated by entering http://solar-
log-wxyz or the aforementioned IP address.
The welcome screen is displayed, showing various information
and the main menu:
2 To go to the configuration dialog boxes, click on Configuration in
the navigation bar at the top.
Note
This manual describes only the menu items related to
configuration. The other menu items are explained in the user
manual.
Configuration at a PC
Overview of "Configuration" menu navigation
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 221 of 374
8.2 Overview of "Configuration" menu navigation
Configuration Start (only
Solar-Log200
) Initial configuration
Basic Lan
WLAN (only for Solar
Log™ WiFi)
Plant groups (only for
Solar Log1000
)
Inverter order (only for
Solar Log1000
, 500
)
Inverter replacement
(only for Solar Log1000
, 500
)
Inverters (only for Solar
Log1000
, 500
)
Forecast
Graphic.
Advanced Internet
WEB export
Text message (SMS)
Errors
Graphic.
Power management
Internal Back-up
System
Update
Configuration at a PC
Configuring network settings (Basis / Lan)
222 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
8.3 Configuring network settings (Basis / Lan)
The network settings are configured correctly at the initial startup and
only need to be modified if, for example, the type of network access is
being changed at a later time.
Note Solar Log
1000
The network settings are configured through the web browser in
the same way as when they are configured directly on the display
(Page 315).
Opening the dialog box
In the tab on the left, select Basis / Lan
The following dialog box appears on the right.
Configuration at a PC
Configuring network settings (Basis / Lan)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 223 of 374
This is divided into the following sections:
Network settings
Internet access
Network router
This is only available if the "Network Router" option is enabled in
the "Internet Access" section.
analog modem (Solar Log1000
analog modem package)
GPRS modem (Solar Log200
/1000
GPRS / mobile communication
package)
"Network Settings" section
If no Internet connection is available, the following functions are not
enabled: E-mail, text messages (SMS), data input to the homepage. In
this case, only local access is possible, either through the PC or router.
1 Under IP Address enter the fixed IP number if Obtain IP Address
automatically is deactivated.
The default address is 192.168.178.49 and must be adapted through
a direct PC connection, or through a router without the DHCP
service, in order to allow access from the PC.
2 The Subnet mask is 055.255.255.0 by default and must be the
same over the whole network.
"Internet Access" section
If Network-Router is selected, the Solar Log™ routes all Internet-
specific data through the network interface to the gateway address. The
router installed there is responsible for ensuring that the data are routed
correctly.
"Network Router (DSL, cable, ISDN)" section
If enabled in the Internet Access section, the Network-Router section
is displayed. The following inputs are required:
3 Under IP Address set obtain automatically.
This is only possible if the Solar LogTM
is connected to an Internet
router that allows the DHCP function. When the search is started,
the Solar Log™ attempts to obtain an IP address through an Internet
router. This can take up to 60 seconds.
If the DHCP server is disabled in the router, network configuration
must be carried out manually. In this case, please consult a network
specialist who can assign a suitable network address, make the
other gateway settings, and so on.
4 The IP address of the Gateway is obtained dynamically by DHCP.
5 Click on Save.
Configuration at a PC
Configuring network settings (Basis / Lan)
224 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
When the settings are saved, the Solar LogTM
is restarted. After
restarting, the new IP address is shown accordingly, and the
network settings are active.
"Analog modem" section (Solar Log1000
analog modem package)
If Internet access by analog modem has been selected, the access data
of the telephone service provider must be entered here.
Internet-by-call No., user name, password
This is pre-set to Internet-by-call access through Arcor, but can be
modified as necessary.
Pre-dial "0".
In certain telephone systems, a "0" has to be dialed before dialing
the actual telephone number.
Dial tone Off
In a standard modem, the dialing process is audible; this provides a
good initial testing function until the connection is established. The
dial tone can then be switched off.
If there are problems with the Internet connection, the best solution
is to check the line with a conventional telephone to determine
whether the telephone connection is working or is disconnected. In
this way, you can find out quickly and easily whether it is necessary
to pre-dial "0".
Note: You should ensure that the telephone system allows charge
group 0190.. numbers (toll numbers).
Allow dial in
Solar Log1000
generally allows dial up if an analog modem is used.
This means that the Solar Log1000
can be dialed up from outside
using a PC and another modem, if this has been enabled.
Max. dial in attempts
The field max. dial in attempts allows you to define how many times
per day the modem dials in.
Configuration at a PC
Configuring network settings (Basis / Lan)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 225 of 374
Dial in password
The password is "solarlog", but this should be changed.
1 If the default Internet-by-call access is to be changed:
Enter the above data
2 Click on Save.
"GPRS modem" section (only for Solar-Log200
/1000
GPRS)
All data are already factory-set for German networks; simply select your
own network.
1 Insert the SIM card in Solar Log1000
GPRS (Page 14)
2 Select a mobile network from the Mobile Service Providers list.
Or: Other … from the list, enter the details of another mobile service
provider, and enter the PIN for the SIM card in the appropriate
boxes.
Note
The mobile service provider recommends leaving the user name
and password empty; however, sometimes it is necessary to type
in some text in order to establish the data connection successfully.
3 The field max. dial in attempts allows you to define how many times
per day the modem dials in.
Note
When the number of dial attempts has been set rather low, it could
happen that fault messages are not sent.
4 Tick Connection time / Always stay online if continuous data
transmission is required.
If this option is enabled, the modem remains constantly switched on,
and can receive or transmit. This setting is recommended for flat-
Configuration at a PC
Configuring network settings (Basis / Lan)
226 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
rate tariffs. Use Always stay online if you are using an appropriate
mobile communication tariff.
5 Tick SMS by modem if direct text messages (SMS) are to be sent.
5 Tick Roaming to activate this function. If this option is activated the
modem can connect within outside networks and thus – depending
on the tariff – generate additional costs.
6 Click on Save.
When the settings are saved, the Solar Log1000
GPRS is
restarted. After restarting, the network settings become active.
Configuration at a PC
Solar Log™ WiFi: WLAN configuration (Basic/WLAN)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 227 of 374
8.4 Solar Log™ WiFi: WLAN configuration (Basic/WLAN)
Note
If Solar-Log™ WiFi has not yet been configured on the unit display,
then it must be registered on the router at the initial log on to the
WiFi by network cable. The Solar-Log™ tries to find its IP Address
by DHCP and is then addressed through the browser as "solar-
log".
Opening the dialog box
On the navigation bar on the left, select Basis/WLAN
The following dialog box appears on the right.
This is divided into the following sections:
WLAN
Network selection
Network settings
Configuration at a PC
Solar Log™ WiFi: WLAN configuration (Basic/WLAN)
228 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
"WLAN" section
Activated / Deactivated
These radio buttons can be used to switch WLAN access on or off.
Status
The bar shows the connection status and reception quality.
"Network selection" section
Find wireless networks
This button is used to initiate a search for wireless networks.
Network name (SSID)
The name of the network is entered here. If the network name is
hidden ("Hidden SSID"), the Access Point is not displayed by the
network scan. In this case, enter the network name manually.
Network key
Enter the network key here.
"Network Settings" section
Obtain automatically (DHCP)
Caution: These settings apply to the WLAN connection to the
router. We recommend using DHCP. The IP address is obtained
automatically if the Solar Log1000
is connected to an Internet router
which allows the DHCP service. After saving and the automatic
restart, the new IP address is displayed.
All routers usually come with the DHCP service enabled, so that all
the subsequent data are entered automatically:
– IP Address, Subnet Mask
Here you can configure the IP address and Subnet mask of the
Solar Log1000
if necessary.
The default address is 192.168.178.49 and can be adapted only
through a direct PC connection, or through a router without the
DHCP service, in order to allow access from the PC.
In this case, please consult a network specialist who can assign
a suitable network address, make the other gateway settings,
and so on.
– Gateway
The gateway is the router to which Solar Log1000
is connected. Its
IP address is entered here automatically, if the DHCP service is
enabled on the router.
– Alternate DNS server
In some networks, the DNS server is a separate address for
resolving Internet addresses (unlike a gateway). In this case, the
IP address of the DNS server is entered here.
1 Enter all the related data (see above list)
2 Click on Save.
Configuration at a PC
Solar Log1000: Defining system groups (Basic / Plant Groups)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 229 of 374
8.5 Solar Log1000: Defining system groups (Basic / Plant Groups)
As the Solar Log1000
can manage up to 100 inverters at the same time,
it is helpful to divide these into groups. To provide a clearer overview,
these groups are then shown in all selection dialog boxes. Each system
group can also be shown on a special large display.
A name can be assigned to each plant group, or even a specific tariff
payment and a yearly target value. Plant groups are therefore also
suitable for managing system expansions.
Example: If a plant which originally has 5 inverters and 30 kWp in the
year 2009 is then extended with 3 more inverters and 20 kWp in the
year 2011, these can be managed conveniently in Solar Log1000
in
separate groups.
Individual inverters can then be selected from the group concerned.
Opening the dialog box
On the navigation bar on the left, select Basic / Plant
groups
The following dialog box appears on the right.
This is divided into the following sections:
Plant groups
Configuration at a PC
Solar Log1000: Defining system groups (Basic / Plant Groups)
230 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Group definition
Only available if the "Divide inverters into plant groups" option is
enabled.
"Groups" section
1 Tick The inverters are divided into groups.
The group definition window appears.
"Group definition" section
Up to 10 plant groups can be defined, each containing up to15
inverters:
2 Click on Add.
A list of inverters is displayed:
3 Click on the desired inverter in the list.
The inverter is transferred into the group definition box.
You can click on Delete to remove individual inverters from the
group definition.
4 For each inverter, assign a unique name under Label for each plant
group.
5 For each inverter, enter the individual amount under Feed-in tariff
(cents).
6 For each inverter, enter the target yield quantity under Yearly
targets (kWh / kWp)
7 When you click on Save the settings become active immediately.
Note
From Firmware 2.8.1 Build 48, consumption meter from plant
groups can be organized.
The organization is only possible, when in (Power management)
Configuration // Extended // Power management
one of the self- consumption rules are selected.
Configuration at a PC
Solar Log1000, 500: Setting the inverter order (Basic / Inverter Order)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 231 of 374
8.6 Solar Log1000, 500: Setting the inverter order (Basic / Inverter Order)
The sequential order of the inverters is determined during inverter
detection, and they are normally sorted by their serial number or
communications address.
The inverter order can be re-sorted only inside a data interface. For
example, an inverter connected through the S0 input or Bluetooth
cannot be swapped with another inverter connected through an RS485
interface.
Opening the dialog box
On the tab on the left, select Basic / Inverter Order
The following dialog box appears on the right.
This is divided into the following sections:
Present (current)
New
Various options for data organization
"Currently" section
The inverters are listed on the left in the old order, with current
positions, inverter names and serial numbers / address numbers.
"New" section
The inverters can be re-sorted on the right:
Configuration at a PC
Solar Log1000, 500: Setting the inverter order (Basic / Inverter Order)
232 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
1 Click on Add.
A list of inverters is displayed:
2 Click on the desired inverter in the list
The inverter is transferred into the group definition box.
Section with data organization options
Changing the inverter order also affects the data inside Solar Log™.
There are 3 options for re-organizing the data:
– Leave data unchanged (e.g. inverter exchange)
If an inverter has been replaced due to a fault and therefore has
to be re-detected and integrated with the system, then the order
of the inverters may change. In this case, the new order has to
be configured in this dialog box. However, the data does not
have to be re-sorted – from the point of view of the data logger,
nothing has changed.
– Reorganizing data to new positions (e.g. for extensions)
If the system has been expanded, or if the existing system is to
be re-sorted with data already logged, it is important for the
inverter data to be re-sorted as well. Otherwise, it is no longer
possible to assign the data.
Data reorganization can take some time, depending on the
amount of data already registered. The reorganization process
should never be interrupted!
Note
The reorganization of data is very computation-intensive, and
therefore we recommend separating the inverter from the Solar
Log™ and reconnecting it only after reorganization is complete.
Configuration at a PC
Solar Log1000, 500: Re-detection after an inverter replacement (Basic /Inverter exchange)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 233 of 374
– Erase all data (recommended at initial setup)
Note:Always select this option if the system is being set up for
the first time. This causes the few test data to be deleted and the
Solar Log™ can then start registering data with a clean
database.
3 When the inverter order has been applied in full and the desired data
organization has been activated, click on Save.
When the settings are saved, the Solar LogTM
is restarted.
8.7 Solar Log1000, 500: Re-detection after an inverter replacement (Basic /Inverter exchange)
In plants with numerous inverters, service cases occur from time to time
in which inverters need to be replaced. This can have effects on the
Solar Log, which may need to be informed about the replacement.
There are 2 cases to be considered here:
Inverter with configurable address (e.g. Fronius, Kaco,
Solarmax): If the inverter address number can be configured
directly on the display, only the address of the old inverter must
be assigned to the new inverter.
Inverter with fixed internal address (e.g. SMA, Danfoss): In
this case, the inverter that has been replaced must be
configured in Solar Log. In particular, if more than 1 inverter is
replaced, the re-detection process is time consuming. To make
the process easier, the "Inverter replacement" function is
integrated for all Solar Log models through a WEB interface.
Note
We recommend carrying out a system and data backup prior to re-
detection. Description of system backup (Page286) and data
backup (Page 290).
Note
The scaling for the X-axis (day times in hours) is set in Basics /
Graph (Page 244).
Opening the dialog box
On the tab on the left, select Basic / Inverter
exchange
The following dialog box appears on the right.
Configuration at a PC
Solar Log1000, 500: Re-detection after an inverter replacement (Basic /Inverter exchange)
234 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
To start inverter detection:
1 Click on the Start subsequent inverter identification button. The
Solar Log™ starts looking for the detectors currently installed.
The search can last for some time, and the display appears as
shown above. The Solar Log™ compares the newly detected
inverters with the list of existing inverters.
A list of inverters is then displayed, where the marked positions indicate
the missing inverters.
2 Click on the Add button to insert the new inverter at the desired
position
Configuration at a PC
Exchanging SMA inverters
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 235 of 374
3 Click on Save. The inverter is now allocated and the Solar Log™
can monitor all inverters again.
8.8 Exchanging SMA inverters
Safety Instructions
Always read and follow all of the instructions in the inverter's manual when
exchanging inverters and components or when updating the inverter's
firmware.
When working on inverters, always disconnect the power connections on
both the AC and DC ends, including pulling the PV string switch out.
Note the cautions and warnings for turning off inverters.
Switch off the Solar Log™; Page 19.
Exchanging SMA inverters via the WEB interface
Check for a new firmware version.
Create a backup.
Check to make sure that all of the inverters are feeding power.
Go to the menu Configuration // Basic // Inverter Exchange in the Solar-
Log™ and start the inverter detection.
Restart the Solar-Log™ to detect additional "channel lists" automatically.
If exchanging inverters via the WEB interface fails, perform the following
steps:
For Solar-Log200
:
Revert to the factory default settings and start the inverter detection.
For Solar Log500, 1000
:
Start the inverter detection via the display on the Solar-Log™.
If this is not successful, revert to the factory default settings and start the
inverter detection.
Procedure in case of logging problems
If the Solar-Log™ sporadically resets on its own or no longer responds, revert
to the factory default settings and reinstall the firmware.
Proceed as follows:
Create a backup.
Upgrade to at least firmware version 2.8.1-49 from December 2012.
Configuration at a PC
Solar Log1000, 500, 200: Configuring the inverter data (Basic / Inverter)
236 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Perform the inverter detection. (All of the inverters have to be feeding
power.)
After the inverters have been successfully detected, restore the old
configuration and backup.
Check that the Solar-Log™ functions are working properly (check the AC
and string power displayed).
If there are still problems with the functions after restoring the backup,
revert to the factory default settings and perform the inverter detection
again and then contact SDS support.
Background Information
The designation of the SMA channel lists is displayed as the device
designation for the inverters, e.g. WR10TL80. These designations have to be
changed with a new inverter firmware update. If this is not the case and
logging problems are observed, there was a problem during the firmware
update or inverter detection.
In this case, disconnect the connections on both the AC and DC ends of the
inverters with problems for several minutes and perform the inverter exchange
function again after the device has been restarted.
8.9 Solar Log1000, 500, 200: Configuring the inverter data (Basic / Inverter)
The "Configure inverter data" dialog box contains all the relevant data
for the inverter. It also has an option for monitoring and detecting
inverter failures.
Opening the dialog box
On the tab on the left, select Basic / Inverter
The following dialog box appears on the right:
Configuration at a PC
Solar Log1000, 500, 200: Configuring the inverter data (Basic / Inverter)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 237 of 374
This is divided into the following sections:
Inverter
Power meter on S0 input
Monitoring
Only available for Solar Log500
/1000
if "Power meter on S0 input"
is enabled in "Inverter mode".
Graphic scaling
Configuration at a PC
Solar Log1000, 500, 200: Configuring the inverter data (Basic / Inverter)
238 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
"Inverter" section
Number, device name, address / serial number
Select inverters from the Number list.
The device names, serial numbers and device numbers are listed
and displayed according to the manufacturers of the inverters.
Check whether all inverters have been detected correctly.
Each inverter is identified uniquely by its serial number.
The inverters are sorted by serial number or communication
address and displayed according to their manufacturers.
The order of the inverters sorted by serial number can be
changed in the "Inverter order" dialog box. This should be done
immediately after automatic detection of the inverters.
Maximum AC Power
To calculate the 70 percent fixed regulation (or another limitation
percentage), this value is needed. Enter the maximum AC power
from the inverter's data specification.
Note
Changes to the inverter's maximum AC power can be disabled under
Configuration/Basic/Inverter.
Configuration at a PC
Solar Log1000, 500, 200: Configuring the inverter data (Basic / Inverter)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 239 of 374
(The field is then grayed out).
By entering your password under Configuration/Extended/Feed-in mgmt.,
this protection is lifted for authorized users.
Installed generator power
The connected power at the individual inverters in Wp. The total
power can be calculated using the formula:
Module power * Number of modules (at individual inverters).
Enter the required value.
Pac correction factor
If the power yield displayed by the inverter is compared with the
calibrated current meter, a certain deviation is found. An
approximate correction factor can be defined in order to compensate
for this inaccuracy.
All yield data are stored internally without any correction factor. This
factor is applied only when the data are displayed. The factor can
therefore be adjusted at any time.
The formula for calculating the correction factor is as follows:
Yield on power meter / Yield at inverter * 1000
If the inverter does not have a display, the correction factor must be
left at 1000 initially, and the factor can then be determined after
about a week.
Enter the required value.
Name
You can enter your own name for the inverter here.
Module field
Each connected string is allocated to a module field. Module fields
are subdivided according to solar module type, angles of inclination
and alignment. If all modules within a system are of the same type
and have the same alignment, only one module field, e.g. "1", is
defined. Strings not used must be switched off (switched to "0").
Other module fields must be defined for modules with different
alignments.
Ideally, each field should be made up of at least two individual
strings, which monitor each other.
Configuration at a PC
Solar Log1000, 500, 200: Configuring the inverter data (Basic / Inverter)
240 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Example:
A plant with 23.6 kWp is divided into 3 × SMA SB5000TL and 2 ×
SMA SB2500. 18 kWp is located on a barn roof with 30° inclination,
20° South-East deviation, and 5 kWp on an adjoining garage roof,
32° inclination, 0° South deviation.
Location Inverter String power
Module field
Barn 1.SB5000TL 2000 1
Barn 1.SB5000TL 2000 1
Barn 1.SB5000TL 2200 1
Barn 2.SB5000TL 2000 1
Barn 2.SB5000TL 2000 1
Barn 2.SB5000TL 2200 1
Barn 3.SB5000TL 2000 1
Barn 3.SB5000TL 2000 1
Barn 3.SB5000TL 2200 1
Garage 1.SB2500 2500 2
Garage 2.SB2500 2500 2
All connected strings allow mutual monitoring, the strings in module
field 1 allow multiple monitoring, and the two strings in module field 2
mutual monitoring.
Enter the required value.
Power meter section
This section is available only if a power meter is connected to a Solar
Log500/1000
and is selected. The "Monitoring" section does not apply to
the power meter.
The external current meter can be configured and used in 5 modes in
Solar Log1000
as the current meter for:
• Inverters
• Whole plant
• a consumption meter.
• Utility Meter (U) and Utility Meter (U+I)
Enable the required option.
Consumption meter mode
If a meter is configured as a consumption meter, it is possible to assign
this meter to a plant group (only Solar Log1000
).
Configuration at a PC
Solar Log1000, 500, 200: Configuring the inverter data (Basic / Inverter)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 241 of 374
By assigning this meter to a plant group, it is possible REST MISSING
In this way, it is possible to calculate a plant group's production with its
(self-) consumption. This allows the feed-in power to be limited to 70%
(or any other percentage) at the grid connection point.
Enable the required option.
This function has to be first activated under Configuration / Extended /
Feed-in mgmt. to activate the 70 percent fixed limitation (or any other
percentage).
"Monitoring" section
This section is only available on the Solar-Log200/500/1000
if the power
meter on the S0 input is activated in inverter mode.
Activated / Deactivated
Monitoring can be enabled or disabled for a desired period.
Message as e-mail / text message (SMS)
Malfunctions can be reported by e-mail and text messages (SMS).
The following are also monitored and detected:
– Failure of an inverter
– Loss of power in one of the module fields
Combined conditions for fault definition:
(Fields Monitoring period, Feed-in power, Deviation, Period
of malfunction)
Monitoring is based on a comparison of the power at all inverters,
including individual trackers in the case of inverters with more than
one tracker. If the target power deviates from the actual power by
more than a certain tolerance (= min. feed-in power), a message can
be sent by e-mail and/or text message (SMS) after the selected fault
duration is reached.
If an individual module loses power, the string power for the same
level of irradiation will drop, and can thus be detected and reported.
Power comparison always works reliably even if the weather is
cloudy. The important thing is that all modules should not be
overshadowed. Therefore, the monitoring period should be
scheduled for periods when there are no shadows.
Configuration at a PC
Solar Log1000, 500, 200: Configuring the inverter data (Basic / Inverter)
242 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
As power measurement in the inverter is very inaccurate under a
certain threshold, a minimum percentage value can also be specified
below which monitoring is interrupted.
Snow cover
False messages may occur if the unit is covered in snow. These are
messages from the power comparison that occur if modules are
partially covered, or failure messages if the inverter is no longer
switched on because it is fully covered by snow.
There are two ways to minimize this problem:
– The minimum percentage value above which power monitoring
starts should be set as high as possible, e.g. 30%. For example, if
the generator power is 4500 Wp, power monitoring will start only at
1350 watts. The partly shaded modules reduce the power from the
unshaded modules so that the required 1350 watts is never reached.
This is how the problem of partial covering is resolved.
– Failure messages are always sent when the inverter is not working
or not online at times that have been configured as unshaded. It is
then assumed that there is a fault. Complete snow covering would
therefore be reported as a failure. In order to solve this problem
there is an indicator for Snow cover (Yes/ No). If this is set to Yes
no failure message is set if all inverters are offline. It is not taken into
account in the period from the start of November till the end of April.
Outside of this period, the snow covering function is automatically
disabled. Monitoring then works as usual and also reports complete
failures of all inverters.
Period of malfunction
This indicates how long a fault should be present continuously,
before it is recognized as a fault. The minimum fault duration is 5
minutes, but a longer one should be selected.
Maximum number of messages per day
So that malfunctions are not reported too often, a maximum number
of messages per day can be defined.
Activate required options and enter values.
"Graphic - Scale" section
Nothing usually has to be changed here, as Solar Log™ automatically
calculates the values for the generator power input. The values can be
adapted to your own data.
View for Day / Month / Year / Total years
Configuration at a PC
Solar Log1000, 500, 200: Configuring the inverter data (Basic / Inverter)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 243 of 374
For each period (day, month, year, total) the maximum value
represented in kW can be entered (except Day, which is a value in
W).
The graph shows these values on the Y-axis.
Changes become effective when a new graph is displayed or after
updating a displayed graph.
Note
The scaling for the X-axis (day times in hours) is set in Basics /
Graph (Page 244).
Enter required scaling.
Click on Save.
Configuration at a PC
Defining forecast data for the solar plant (Basic / Forecast)
244 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
8.10 Defining forecast data for the solar plant (Basic / Forecast)
By setting forecast values for the yield data, you can check on the
graph whether the plant is reaching the desired annual yield or not.
To do this, a percentage rate is allocated to each month. This is
deduced from the yield statistics over the previous years.
Solar Log™ always calculates the target value cumulatively, per day.
This means that, at the beginning of the month, it is not the total
monthly target that is set, but the target for days already passed, plus
that of the current day.
In the forecast, Solar Log™ also takes account of the yields in all
previous years, and in this way can allow for local weather events (in
most cases, snow in December). The yearly forecast is therefore
usually fairly accurate by September.
Opening the dialog box
On the tab on the left, select Basic / Forecast
The following dialog box appears on the right.
This is divided into the following sections:
Plant data
Target / actual calculation
Configuration at a PC
Configuring the data display graph (Basic/Graphics)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 245 of 374
"Plant data" section
To set the plant data:
1 The Plant size is determined automatically from the total generator
power output from the inverters, and is shown in WattsPeak.
2 Under Feed-in tariff, enter the feed-in compensation rate.
With this factor, the yield in euro is calculated on the graph.
"Target / actual calculation" section
To set the parameters for the target / actual calculation:
3 Under Yearly target, enter the desired annual target in kWh / kWp.
4 Under Monthly percentages % enter the annual target percentage
per month.
The monthly percentages must add up to 100% of the yearly target.
The monthly values should be adapted to suit the local conditions.
5 Click on Save.
8.11 Configuring the data display graph (Basic/Graphics)
In the "visualization" dialog box, you can set the daily time period for
display in the daily graph. The default setting does not usually have to
be changed.
The curve that shows the yield data is plotted against an X-axis and Y-
axis: The X-axis shows the daily curve in full hours, and the Y-axis
shows the value measured in W.
The daily time period to be shown on the X-axis can be set for each
month according to the expected measurement period. This has no
effect on the actual measuring time, it only affects the readability of the
displayed curve.
Example: January, daily time period set is 8:00 h to 17:00 h (5:00pm):
Note
The Y-scale is set under Basic / Graphics (Page 236).
Opening the dialog box
On the tab on the left, select Basic / Graphics
The following dialog box appears on the right.
Configuration at a PC
Configuring the data display graph (Basic/Graphics)
246 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
"Visualization / X-scale" section
To select the daily time period to be displayed:
1 At X-scale start of day, enter the desired time for the month in full
hours – minutes are ignored.
2 At X-scale end of day, enter the desired time for the month in full
hours – minutes are ignored.
3 Click on Save.
Changes become effective the next time the graph is displayed, or after
the displayed graph is updated.
Configuration at a PC
Plant information for the homepage and banners (Extended / Internet)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 247 of 374
8.12 Plant information for the homepage and banners (Extended / Internet)
So that the Solar-Log™ can send data over the Internet and/or onto the
web-site, it must be connected to an Internet router and network
configuration must be completed.
Opening the dialog box
On the tab on the left, select Extended / Internet
The following dialog box appears on the right:
This sets the type of Solar-Log™ homepage; for more information
about the homepage Page 370.
1 Click the radio button for the desired type of homepage:
– Full Service
– Classic-2nd
Edition
– Self Made
If this type is selected, the other sections "Homepage", "Event
log" and "Banner“ are opened for entering additional data.
– Classic-1st
Edition
If this type is selected, the other sections "Homepage", "Event
log" and "Banner“ are opened for entering additional data.
Configuration at a PC
Plant information for the homepage and banners (Extended / Internet)
248 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
"Self Made" and "Classic-1st
Edition ('solarlog-home')"
2 Adapt the example models to your own data.
3 Click on Save.
Configuration at a PC
Configuring automatic data export (Extended / WEB export)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 249 of 374
8.13 Configuring automatic data export (Extended / WEB export)
The automatic data export allows you to regularly transfer yield data to
a homepage, in order to present the system on the Internet along with
its online data.
To set up and prepare a homepage, please also refer to the
"Homepage" section, Page 370.
Opening the dialog box
On the tab on the left, select Extended / Web Export
The following dialog box appears on the right.
Configuration at a PC
Configuring automatic data export (Extended / WEB export)
250 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
This is divided into the following sections:
Periodic data export
Manual data export (optional CSV format)
"Periodic data export" section
1 FTP Server, this is usually the name of the homepage.
2 User name and Password are the details needed for accessing the
homepage.
3 A Directory only has to be entered here if the Solar Log™
homepage is not to be located directly in the main directory of your
homepage. Otherwise, this box can be left empty.
4 The Update interval determines how often the Solar Log1000
refreshes the data. All the '5 minute data' not yet sent are always
transferred, even if the interval is considerably greater, e.g. 1 hour.
With daily, the data is transferred once per day in the morning and
once at the end of the day. With fixed time a customized time can
be set for the transfer.
5 If the Solar Log™ homepage is to be supplied with data by export,
select Solar Log™ data format.
6 Data can also be exported in CSV data format. The data are then
transferred in an Excel compatible format onto the homepage.
There, they can be used to make further evaluations if necessary. In
the mornings and evenings (when switching online / offline), all data
stored at the time are transferred. The 5 minute data are always
saved with their date, so that a comprehensive archive can be kept.
7 Click on Save.
8 Data transfer can be tested immediately during configuration by
using the Start test transmission button. Always save any changes
to the settings first. In the Status field, the step being performed is
displayed during the test transfer.
Note
If Periodic data export is deactivated, no data are transferred to
the homepage.
If there are problems with the data transfer, you can check in the Last
transmission and Status boxes when was the last time that Solar
Log1000
attempted to transfer the data..
Note
Possible status codes Page 358
Configuration at a PC
Configuring e-mail messages (Extended / E-mail)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 251 of 374
"Manual data export" section
The current daily values can be exported manually to the hard drive (in
CSV Format). Data in CSV Format are exported in the morning and
evening (when switching online / offline). The 5 minute data are always
saved with their date, so that a comprehensive archive can be kept.
If the Solar Log™ does not have Internet access, the current values
and current daily values can also be exported manually to the hard
drive (in CSV format).
1 Click on Save.
The data are formatted and a new link is displayed beside
Save:
2 Click on Click here to save
Another box opens, asking you whether you want to open the
export file or indicate a location where the file is to be saved.
8.14 Configuring e-mail messages (Extended / E-mail)
The Solar Log1000
contains an e-mail program which can send
messages in the following situations:
Daily yield overview
Inverter faults
Inverter failure
Deviation from target power
The settings in this section are used both for the general configuration
of e-mail messages, and for deciding if and when the daily yield values
are to be sent for information.
Note
For sending e-mails we recommend using the e-mail address
provided by Solare Datensysteme GmbH. This is sent to you by e-
mail in the framework of the portal registration process.
In addition, you also have the option of saving your own address.
Configuration at a PC
Configuring e-mail messages (Extended / E-mail)
252 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Opening the dialog box
On the tab on the left, select Extended / E-mail
The following dialog box appears on the right:
This is divided into the following sections:
Basic e-mail configuration
E-mail messages
"E-mail basic settings" section
Using the solarlog-wed.de address:
SMTP Server, User name ad Password
You will find your access data in the confirmation e-mail that was
sent to you after homepage registration. Page 370.
E-mail address from and E-mail address to
E-mail address from correspond to the e-mail address in the
confirmation e-mail. The desired receiver's address must be entered
in the field E-mail address to.
Using your own e-mail address:
If you are using your own e-mail address and your own e-mail server,
E-mail address from and E-mail address to are identical and each
is your own e-mail address. SMTP Server, User name and
Password must be completed with those of the respective supplier
and postal address.
Configuration at a PC
Configuring e-mail messages (Extended / E-mail)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 253 of 374
"E-mail messages" section
3 Click on the Activated button.
4 Under Sending time enter the weekday and time at which e-mail
messages are to be sent.
5 Click on Save.
6 E-mail messaging can be tested using the Start test transmission
button.
Last transmission and Status indicate the last time that Solar LogTM
attempted to send an e-mail.
Possible status codes Page 358
Note
Please select a different sending time to the one suggested, as at
this time the server is heavily used and this can lead to delays.
A sending time between 20:00 (8:00 pm) and 23:30 (11:30 pm) is
recommended.
Configuration at a PC
Configuring text messages (SMS) (Extended / SMS)
254 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
8.15 Configuring text messages (SMS) (Extended / SMS)
The text message (SMS) program sends messages with the desired
content:
Daily yield overview
Inverter faults
Inverter failure
Deviation from target power
Text messages (SMS) are sent in two stages. First, an e-mail message
is sent to an e-mail service provider who provides the text message
(SMS) service. From a keyword on the Subject line, this provider
detects that the message is to be forwarded as a text message (SMS)
to a certain number. For the incoming e-mails, some e-mail providers
forward a text message (SMS) free of charge with the Subject line for
information.
Opening the dialog box
On the tab on the left, select Extended / SMS
The following dialog box appears on the right:
This is divided into the following sections:
SMS basic settings
SMS messages
"Basic SMS settings" section
1 SMTP Server, User name and Password see the documentation
provided by your Internet/e-mail service provider.
2 If you are using your own e-mail server, E-mail address from and
E-mail address to are same (i.e. your own e-mail address).
Configuration at a PC
Configuring text messages (SMS) (Extended / SMS)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 255 of 374
"Basic SMS settings" section
3 Click on the Activated button.
4 Under Sending time enter the weekday and time at which
messages are to be sent.
5 Yield in subject line means that the SMS text is also written on the
Subject line..
6 Click on Save.
7 SMS transfer can be tested immediately during configuration by
using the Start test transmission button. Always save your settings
first.
Note: Last transmission and Status indicate the last time that Solar
LogTM
attempted to send a text message (SMS).
Possible status codes Page 358
Configuration at a PC
Setting fault messages (Extended / Malfunction)
256 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
8.16 Setting fault messages (Extended / Malfunction)
If certain status or fault codes occur, Solar Log™ can send messages
by e-mail or text message (SMS).
Opening the dialog box
On the tab on the left, select Extended / Malfunction
The following dialog box appears on the right:
This is divided into the following sections:
Inverter
Section on code selection
"Inverter" section
The status and fault codes that are available depend on the inverter
type. To find out which status and fault codes are relevant for automatic
messaging, please refer to the inverter user manual.
Configuration at a PC
Feed-in management for Solar Log™ PM+ (Extended / Feed-in Management)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 257 of 374
Section on code selection
The default setting is that messages are sent for all fault codes. You
can use this section to send messages more selectively. This will
prevent text messages (SMS) from being sent for relatively minor faults.
1 On the List of all status codes and List of all error codes select
the desired groups and set the number of faults (Activate after x
measurements) after which a message is to be sent.
Even the Max. number per day can be specified for the messages
to be sent.
2 Click on Save.
8.17 Feed-in management for Solar Log™ PM+ (Extended / Feed-in Management)
The Solar LogTM
function PM+ is composed of the active power
reduction and reactive power control components. Thus Solar LogTM
offers the possibility to implement the most current requirements of the
German Renewable Energy Act (EEG 2012) in this area.
The EEG stipulates that certain energy generation plants must possess
a technical device for active power reduction and/or reactive power
control. The actual control of the active and reactive power in PV plants
is performed by the inverter(s). The inverters are controlled by the Solar
LogTM
.
In order to control generation plants that are connected to a distribution
network at any certain point in time, the network operators use
telecontrol technology. The peripheral energy plants can be controlled
from one central point. To this end these plants must be coupled with
the relevant telecontrol technology. There are several types of transfer
channel used for transferring the network operator's signals to the
receiver:
Classic ripple control technology
Signals are modulated according to the supply voltage and
transferred via the power network
Radio ripple control technology
Signals are transferred by radio via special long-wave channels.
Telecontrol technology
Signals are generally transferred using mobile radio; these
telecontrol plants can also be used to transfer feedback signals to
the network operator.
The technology used depends on the level of development of the
respective network operator.
The control signals emitted by the network operator are converted to
potential-free signal contacts by the telecontrol technology and can be
evaluated by the Solar LogTM
PM+.
Separate ripple control receivers can also be used for controlling active and
reactive power. Up to two ripple control receivers can be connected to Solar
LogTM
PM+ devices.
Configuration at a PC
Feed-in management for Solar Log™ PM+ (Extended / Feed-in Management)
258 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Note
The feed-in management function is not available for all supported inverters.
Prior to installation please check whether PM+ (active and reactive power) is
supported by the inverters used.
Additional information as well as our inverter database can be found
underwww.solar-log.com/pm+.
Note
The power management functions are only possible with a cable connection
between the Solar Log™ and the inverters. It is not possible to control the
inverters via Bluetooth.
Opening the dialog box
Select Configuration/Extended/Feed-in mgmt in the menu
The following dialog box appears on the right:
The dialog box for feed-in management is divided into the following sections:
Activate password protection (Chapter8.17.1)
Active power reduction (Chapter 8.17.2)
Configuration at a PC
Feed-in management for Solar Log™ PM+ (Extended / Feed-in Management)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 259 of 374
Reactive power control (Chapter 8.17.8)
Networking several Solar Logs (Chapter8.17.15)
8.17.1 Activating password protection
The settings in the area of feed-in management can have an effect on the
behavior of the inverter. In order to protect access to these options from
improper configuration the area must be protected by a password.
Field for activating password protection
By entering the standard password "PM", the password protection function can
be deactivated. The configuration options in the area of feed-in management
are then active for the user and can be saved.
If no password is entered, the "Save" button in the feed-in management menu is
unavailable. This is shown by the reference note "Settings blocked. Entry of
password required." at the bottom of the page.
Note
We advise installers to discuss with their customers the scope of the settings
in the area of feed-in management, to block the configuration menu using a
password, and to assign an individual password.
In addition to activation by entering a password, a new individual password
must be assigned under
Configuration/Internal/System.
Assigning a password for feed-in management
Configuration at a PC
Feed-in management for Solar Log™ PM+ (Extended / Feed-in Management)
260 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Note
If SMA inverters are used, an additional query appears into which the SMA
Grid Code can be entered. It is necessary to unblock it if the Solar Log™ will
be used to control the inverter in the area of reactive power.
Customers receive this code individually from SMA.
8.17.2 Setting up active power reduction
This menu item offers the possibility of configuring various forms of active
power reduction.
Note
The type of active power reduction that must be provided by a specific PV
plant depends on the power of the plant and the date it was constructed, and
is governed by the EEG 2012, the Low-Voltage and Medium-Voltage
Directive.
The planner and/or installer of your plant or the respective network operator
can provide you with information regarding the method of active power
reduction.
Note
The feed-in management function is not available for all supported inverters.
Prior to installation please check whether PM+ (active and reactive power) is
supported by the inverters used.
Additional information as well as our inverter database can be found
underwww.solar-log.com/pm+.
Active power reduction menu for PM devices
Configuration at a PC
Feed-in management for Solar Log™ PM+ (Extended / Feed-in Management)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 261 of 374
Note
For the active power reduction to operate flawlessly, the Maximum AC power
has to be entered for each and every inverter.
This is configured in the Configuration/Basic/Inverter menu.
The field Maximum AC power is only available after the PM password has
been entered.
8.17.3 "Deactivated" menu item
When this menu item is selected, active power reduction is deactivated. This
is how the Solar LogTM
is set at the time of delivery.
8.17.4 "Remote controlled" menu item (only Solar LogTM PM+ models)
This option should be selected if you want the active power reduction to be
remote controlled by the grid operator.
To enable this, a ripple control receiver is required.
The type of ripple control receiver or telecontrol technology used depends on
the level of development of the respective grid operator. The control signals
emitted by the grid operator are converted to potential-free signal contacts by
the ripple control receiver and can be evaluated by the Solar Log™ PM+
models via the digital PM+ interface.
Selecting the "Remote controlled" menu item expands the setting options.
The following dialog box appears on the right.
Configuration at a PC
Feed-in management for Solar Log™ PM+ (Extended / Feed-in Management)
262 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Configuration menu for remote controlled active power reduction
"Interface" section
Depending on the type of Solar LogTM
, the interfaces for communication with
the connected inverters are shown here. Depending on the model used, this
list can also contain less entries.
Select the interface or interfaces that correspond to those to which the
inverters that will be controlled are connected.
"Inverter adjustment" section
This option can be used to activate the active power reduction function. This
option allows configuration to be performed, and then activated or deactivated
at a later date with a mouse click.
Configuration at a PC
Feed-in management for Solar Log™ PM+ (Extended / Feed-in Management)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 263 of 374
"Channel and level setup" section
The relay outputs for the ripple control receiver are connected to the PM+
input of the Solar Log™. This allows the network operator's signals to be
evaluated by the Solar Log™.
Schematic diagram of a ripple control receiver with three relays and coupled to the digital inputs of the Solar Log™ PM+
In practice, various ripple control receivers with varying numbers of relays and
different signal coding are used. The configuration matrix for the Solar Log™
PM+ thus offers maximum flexibility – most of the usual popular versions can
be configured.
Ripple control receivers generally possess 2 to 5 relays. The assignment of
the individual relay states for certain reduction levels is specified by the
respective network operator and stored in the Solar Log™ using this matrix. In
this way the connected inverters can be adjusted to meet the specified
reduction levels.
Four levels are shown in the basic setting. The "+" sign can be used to extend
the list by additional levels.
For each level, the input signal combination and a value for the power in % is
entered.
In "Advanced Installation Manual – Feed-in Management", several examples
of ripple control receivers and telecontrol plants are listed, along with their
coupling with Solar Log™ PM+ and the respective configuration matrix.
Closing relays at level 4 (only Solar-Log1000
PM+)
By selecting this function the potential-free control relay for the Solar Log1000
PM+ is closed when level 4 is active.
Configuration at a PC
Feed-in management for Solar Log™ PM+ (Extended / Feed-in Management)
264 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
The relay may be loaded with a maximum of 24 V DC and 5A.
230 V consumers must be connected through another load relay.
Please read the relevant chapter in the installation manual.
In the example, level 4 is defined at 0%. If an individual reduction level should
be signaled via a relay, this input combination is to be configured at level 4.
Closing Solar Log relay power reduction
(only Solar-Log1000
PM+)
Select this option in order to signal any power reduction via relay output.
The relay may be loaded with a maximum of 24 V DC and 5A.
220 V consumers must be connected through another load relay.
Please read the relevant chapter in the installation manual.
E-mail when power reduction changes
Select this option in order to be informed by e-mail of any power change. The
e-mail address entered under Configuration / Extended / E-mail will be used
for this purpose.
Max. change in power:
A jerky reduction or increase in active power could have a negative impact on
inverters in the long-term.
The "max. change in power" field is used to specify how high the maximum
percentage change in power is per period of time (15 seconds).
This value refers to the power reduction but is also used when starting up the
plant after a power reduction.
8.17.5 "70 percent fixed regulation" menu item
By activating this menu item the inverter(s) are controlled to be fixed at 70% of
the installed DC power. s a reference value the "Maximum AC power" entered
under the menu item Configuration / Basic / Inverter is required, however, in
order to be able to control down to exactly 70% of the "connected generator
power".
Note
Changes to the maximum AC power of the inverter in the
Configuration/Basic/Inverter are disabled.
By entering your password under Configuration / Extended / Feed-in mgmt.
this protection is lifted for authorized users.
Configuration at a PC
Feed-in management for Solar Log™ PM+ (Extended / Feed-in Management)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 265 of 374
Numeric example of 70% fixed regulation
Example 1
DC power 12kWp
AC power 12kW
70% corresponds to 8.4kW
As the AC and DC power are identical, the down-control is correct.
Example 2
DC power 12 kWp
AC power 10kW
70% of the DC power corresponds to 8.4kW
For this reason the inverter controlled by the Solar Log™ is reduced to 84% (8.4kW) and not only to 70% (7kW).
8.17.6 "70 percent fixed regulation including consumption of self-produced power"
menu item
By activating this function the power fed-in at the feed-in point is reduced to a
maximum of 70% of the installed DC power.
As a reference value the "Maximum AC power" entered under the menu item
Configuration / Basic / Inverter Configuration / Basic / Inverter is required, in
order to be able to limit the "connected generator power" to exactly 70%.
By using an energy meter that records its own consumption, the current
consumption is determined and subtracted from the energy generated by the
inverter. Only in the event that its own consumption is less than 30% of the
module power, the Solar Log™ will step in and down-control the inverter until
70% at the feed-in point is not exceeded.
Note
For this function to work a meter to measure the inverter's own consumption
must be connected to the Solar Log™ and configured.
"Interface" section
Configuration at a PC
Feed-in management for Solar Log™ PM+ (Extended / Feed-in Management)
266 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Depending on the type of Solar LogTM
, the interfaces for communication with
the connected inverters are shown here. Depending on the model used, this
list can also contain less entries.
Select the interface or interfaces that correspond to those to which the
inverters that will be controlled are connected.
Diagnostics with 10% section
A dynamic limitation of 10% can be simulated with this test function.
The measured data is displayed in the following graphic.
Note
From Firmware 2.8.1 Build 48, consumption meter from plant
groups can be organized.
The organization is only possible, when in (Power management)
Configuration // Extended // Power management
one of the self- consumption rules are selected.
8.17.7 Menu Item Fixed Regulation with Current Consumption Withholding of X Percent
By activating this function, the power fed-in at the feed-in point is reduced to the
maximum set percentage of the installed DC power.
As a reference value the "Maximum AC power" entered under the menu item
Configuration / Basic / Inverter Configuration / Basic / Inverter is required, in
order to be able to limit the "connected generator power" to the exact
percentage entered.
By using an energy meter that records its own consumption, the current
consumption is determined and subtracted from the energy generated by the
inverter. Only in the event that its own consumption is too low, the Solar Log™
will step in and limit inverter until the set percentage at the feed-in point is not
exceeded.
Configuration at a PC
Feed-in management for Solar Log™ PM+ (Extended / Feed-in Management)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 267 of 374
Note
From Firmware 2.8.1 Build 48, consumption meter from plant
groups can be organized.
The organization is only possible, when in (Power management)
Configuration // Extended // Power management
one of the self- consumption rules are selected.
8.17.8 Setting up reactive power control
This menu item offers the possibility of configuring various forms of reactive
power control.
Note
The type of reactive power control that must be provided by a specific PV
plant depends on the power of the plant and the date it was constructed, and
is governed by the EEG 2012, the Low-Voltage and Medium-Voltage
Directive.
The planner and/or installer of your plant or the respective grid operator can
provide you with information regarding the method of reactive power control.
Note
The feed-in management function is not available for all supported inverters.
Prior to installation please check whether PM+ is supported by the inverters
used.
Additional information as well as our inverter database can be found under
www.solar-log.com/pm+.
Using the Solar-Log™ various options for reactive power control can be
selected:
Deactivated
fixed value cos (Phi) shift factor
fixed reactive power in Var
variable cos (Phi) shift factor over characteristic curve P/Pn
variable reactive power over characteristic curve Q(U) (only Solar
Log1000
PM+)
controllable shift factor cos (Phi) (only Solar- og™ PM+)
Configuration at a PC
Feed-in management for Solar Log™ PM+ (Extended / Feed-in Management)
268 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
8.17.9 "Deactivated" menu item
When this menu item is selected, reactive power control is deactivated. This is
how the Solar LogTM
is set at the time of delivery.
8.17.10 "Fixed value cos (Phi) shift factor" menu item
If the grid operator should specify a fixed target value, this option should be
activated.
By selecting this option, additional settings points will arise.
The following dialog box appears on the right:
Configuration options with fixed shift factor cos (Phi)
"Interface" section
Depending on the type of Solar LogTM
, the interfaces for communication with
the connected inverters are shown here. Depending on the model used, this
list can also contain less entries.
Select the interface or interfaces that correspond to those to which the
inverters that will be controlled are connected.
Cos (Phi) section
Using this matrix it is possible to specify a fixed cos (Phi) for certain periods of
time. If over the course of one day various shift factors must be adhered to,
they can be configured here.
Configuration at a PC
Feed-in management for Solar Log™ PM+ (Extended / Feed-in Management)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 269 of 374
In the "from (time)" column the respective start time is defined.
In the "Cos (Phi)" column the shift factor cos (Phi) that must be adhered to
from this start time can be specified.
In the "Inductive" column an inductive and capacitive cos (Phi) is selected by a
check mark. The check mark sets the cos (Phi) to inductive.
If a certain cos (Phi) must be adhered to for 24 hours, the time 00:00 as well
as the cos (Phi) may only be entered in the first line. The other lines must also
remain filled with 00:00.
8.17.11 "Fixed reactive power in Var" menu item
If the grid operator should specify an absolute target value the reactive power
in Var, this option should be activated.
By selecting this option, additional settings points will arise.
The following dialog box appears on the right:
Configuration options for fixed reactive power in Var
Configuration at a PC
Feed-in management for Solar Log™ PM+ (Extended / Feed-in Management)
270 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
"Interface" section
Depending on the type of Solar LogTM
, the interfaces for communication with
the connected inverters are shown here. Depending on the model used, this
list can also contain less entries.
Select the interface or interfaces that correspond to those to which the
inverters that will be controlled are connected.
Reactive power section
Using this matrix it is possible to specify a fixed reactive power value in Var for
certain periods of time. If over the course of one day various reactive power
values must be adhered to, they can be configured here.
In the "from (time)" column the respective start time is defined.
In the "Reactive power (Var)" column the reactive power that must be adhered
to from this start time can be specified.
In the "Inductive" column an inductive and capacitive reactive power is
selected by a check mark. The check mark sets the reactive power to
inductive.
If a certain reactive power in Var must be supplied for 24 hours, the time 00:00
as well as the value in Var may only be entered in the first line. The other lines
must also remain filled with 00:00.
"Variable cos (Phi) shift factor over characteristic curve P/Pn" menu item
This option is to be selected if the grid operator requires the adjustment of the
cos (Phi) using a P/Pn characteristic curve. The characteristic curve P/Pn is
used to ascertain the relationship between current existing active (P) and
rated power (Pn), and the value is assigned a cos (phi) defined by the
characteristic curve.
Configuration at a PC
Feed-in management for Solar Log™ PM+ (Extended / Feed-in Management)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 271 of 374
Configuration options for the "Variable shift factor" using the "2 point characteristic curve"
"Interface" section
Depending on the type of Solar LogTM
, the interfaces for communication with
the connected inverters are shown here. Depending on the model used, this
list can also contain less entries.
Select the interface or interfaces that correspond to those to which the
inverters that will be controlled are connected.
Type of characteristic curve section
Using this menu item a characteristic curve specified by the grid operator can
be stored. In principle a distinction is made here between a 2 point and a 4
point characteristic curve.
Configuration at a PC
Feed-in management for Solar Log™ PM+ (Extended / Feed-in Management)
272 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
"2 point characteristic curve"
By selecting "2 point characteristic curve" it is possible to define a
characteristic curve using 2 points.
The characteristic curve graphic depicts a possible characteristic curve as an
example. The sample characteristic curve does not change when values are
added. The values entered in fields A and B do not correspond to the sample
characteristic curve.
The points specified by the grid operator are defined by the input fields at
point A and B in the Solar LogTM..
The values entered per line describe the
corresponding point on the characteristic curve.
After entering the values, click on "Save".
Configuration at a PC
Feed-in management for Solar Log™ PM+ (Extended / Feed-in Management)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 273 of 374
"4 point characteristic curve"
Configuration options for the "Variable shift factor" using the "4 point characteristic curve"
By selecting "4 point characteristic curve" it is possible to define a
characteristic curve using 4 points.
The characteristic curve graphic depicts a possible characteristic curve as an
example. The sample characteristic curve does not change when values are
added. The values entered in fields A-D do not correspond to the sample
characteristic curve.
Configuration at a PC
Feed-in management for Solar Log™ PM+ (Extended / Feed-in Management)
274 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
The points specified by the grid operator are defined by the input fields at
point A to D in the Solar LogTM
. The values entered per line describe the
corresponding point on the characteristic curve.
After entering the values, click on "Save".
8.17.12 "Variable reactive power over characteristic curve Q(U)"
menu item(only Solar Log1000 PM+)
This option is only relevant for plants which feed in directly at the medium-
voltage level.
In order to be able to achieve this function, the Solar Log™ Utility Meter and
voltage transformers are required in addition to a Solar Log1000
PM+. The
voltage transformers convert the voltage of the medium-voltage network to
100V in general. This measurement voltage is measured by the Solar Log™
Utility Meter.
The Solar Log™ Utility Meter is coupled to the Solar Log™ via the RS485 bus
and continually forwards the values for the measurement voltage to the
connected Solar Log1000
PM+. Using the stored characteristic curve the Solar
Log1000
PM+ continually calculates the reactive power to be supplied and
controls the connected inverter accordingly.
Schematic design of the supply of variable reactive power using the Q(U) function
For this option the reactive power of the inverter that is connected to the Solar
Log1000
PM+ is controlled using the measured voltage at the feed-in point.
Configuration at a PC
Feed-in management for Solar Log™ PM+ (Extended / Feed-in Management)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 275 of 374
8.17.13 Installing the Solar-Log™ Utility Meter (Janitza UMG 104)
For the Solar Log PM+, the Solar-Log™ Utility Meter can be connected via the
RS485A or RS485/422B.
Note
Use an RS485 port for each inverter and the utilty meter.
The utility meter can not be combined with inverters on a bus.
Connection diagram for Utility Meter
In order to measure the voltage of the medium-voltage level, voltage
transformers are required. A voltage transformer is a device the transforms an
electrical voltage (here generally medium-voltage level 20kV) into another
voltage (100V measurement voltage). These voltage transformers are
generally installed on the primary side of the transformer station or must be
fitted there.
Procedure
1) Enter the supply voltage into the Utility Meter
The supply voltage may be in the range of 95-240Vac, 45-65Hz or 135-
340Vdc and can be seen on the rating plate of the Utility Meter.
The connection lines for the supply voltage must be safeguarded using a
fuse listed in the UL (6A type C).
Configuration at a PC
Feed-in management for Solar Log™ PM+ (Extended / Feed-in Management)
276 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Note
We recommend using a fuse to safeguard the connection lines for the supply
voltage. Please follow the instructions in the Utility Meter manual.
Note
Supply voltage that does not correspond to the specifications on the rating
plate can cause malfunctions and damage the device.
Caution
The inputs for the supply voltage are dangerous to touch.
2) Connect measurement voltage L1, L2, L3 and N at the terminals on the
underside of the Utility Meter.
Note
The measurement voltage must in effect be at least 10V or an exact
measurement is not possible.
3) Connect the Utility Meter with RS485 bus of the Solar Log1000
PM+
Solar Log™ terminal block connector
Utility meter terminal strip
Terminal Terminal
1 22 - B
4 23 – A
The RS485 bus must be terminated.
Install an 120Ω, 1/4W resistor between Pin 22 and 23 to terminate.
Note
If possible, use one RS485 connection each for the inverter and for the Utility
Meter. This allows the control times for the inverter to be optimized.
Note
When addressing the inverter the address "1" should be kept free for the Utility
Meter. Information concerning addressing the Utility Meter is supplied together
with the device.
4) Checking the settings on the Utility Meter
Configuration at a PC
Feed-in management for Solar Log™ PM+ (Extended / Feed-in Management)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 277 of 374
Check the following settings on the Utility Meter Display:
MODBUS Address (PRG 200 = 1)
Baud rate RS485 (PRG 202 = 2)
Mode (PRG 203 = 0)
If the values differ, follow the instruction in the accompanying manual for
configuring the Utility Meter.
5) Perform inverter detection.
See the installation manual, Chapter "Performing inverter detection"
6) Assign Utility Meter function
In the Solar-Log1000
PM+ call up the Configuration / Basic / Inverter menu.
Select meter and activate it as the Utility Meter.
Note
Ensure that the baud rate of the RS 485 interface of the Janitza UMG 104 is
configured to 38400.
Configuration of the meter as a Utility Meter
Configuration at a PC
Feed-in management for Solar Log™ PM+ (Extended / Feed-in Management)
278 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Configuration of the meter as a Utility Meter in the display of the Solar Log1000
PM+
7) Configuration of feed-in management
Configuration at a PC
Feed-in management for Solar Log™ PM+ (Extended / Feed-in Management)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 279 of 374
Configuration options for characteristic curve Q(U) using 2 point characteristic curve
"Interface" section
Depending on the type of Solar LogTM
, the interfaces for communication with the
connected inverters are shown here. Depending on the model used, this list can
also contain less entries.
Select the interface or interfaces that correspond to those to which the inverters that
will be controlled are connected.
Configuration at a PC
Feed-in management for Solar Log™ PM+ (Extended / Feed-in Management)
280 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Note
If possible, use one RS485 connection each for the inverter and for the
Utility Meter. This allows the control times to be optimized for the
inverters and prevents incompatibility between inverters and the Utility
Meter.
Type of characteristic curve section
Using this menu item a characteristic curve specified by the grid operator can be
stored. In principle a distinction is made here between a 2 point and a 4 point
characteristic curve.
"2 point characteristic curve"
If the grid operator specifies a 2 point characteristic curve, this menu item must be
selected.
The characteristic curve graphic depicts a possible characteristic curve as an
example. The sample characteristic curve does not change when values are added.
The values entered in fields A and B do not correspond to the sample characteristic
curve.
The points specified by the grid operator are defined by the input fields at point A
and B in the Solar LogTM..
The values entered per line describe the corresponding
point on the characteristic curve.
After entering the values, click on "Save".
"Maximum apparent power for the generation plant" menu item
In this field the maximum apparent power of the entire generation plant must be
entered.
"Uc" menu item
In this field the agreed grid voltage in the grid operator's medium-voltage network is
entered. This value is specified by the grid operator. As a rule the network voltage
at medium voltage level corresponds to 20,000 V.
"UNS" menu item
The reference voltage to be entered depends on the sensor used. For the Solar
LogTM
Utility Meter the factory setting is 100.0 V.
"4 point characteristic curve"
If the grid operator specifies a 4 point characteristic curve, this menu item must be
selected.
The characteristic curve graphic depicts a possible characteristic curve as an
example. The sample characteristic curve does not change when values are added.
Configuration at a PC
Feed-in management for Solar Log™ PM+ (Extended / Feed-in Management)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 281 of 374
The values entered in fields A-D do not correspond to the sample characteristic
curve.
The points specified by the grid operator are defined by the input fields at point A to
D in the Solar LogTM
. The values entered per line describe the corresponding point
on the characteristic curve.
After entering the values, click on "Save".
"Maximum apparent power for the generation plant" menu item
In this field the maximum apparent power of the entire generation plant must be
entered.
"Uc" menu item
In this field the agreed grid voltage in the grid operator's medium-voltage network is
entered. This value is specified by the grid operator. As a rule the network voltage
at medium voltage level corresponds to 20,000 V.
"UNS" menu item
The reference voltage to be entered depends on the sensor used. For the Solar-
LogTM Utility Meter the factory setting is 100.0 V.
8.17.14 "Controllable shift factor cos (Phi)" menu item (only Solar-Log™ PM+)
This option should be selected if you want the reactive power supply to be remote
controlled by the network operator.
To enable this, a ripple control receiver is required.
The type of ripple control receiver used depends on the level of development of the
respective grid operator. The control signals emitted by the grid operator are
converted to potential-free signal contacts by the ripple control receiver and can be
evaluated by the Solar LogTM
PM+ models via the digital PM+ interface.
Selecting the "Controllable shift factor" menu item changes the setting options.
The following dialog box appears on the right.
Configuration at a PC
Feed-in management for Solar Log™ PM+ (Extended / Feed-in Management)
282 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Configuration menu for remote controlled active power reduction
"Interface" section
Depending on the type of Solar LogTM
, the interfaces for communication with the
connected inverters are shown here. Depending on the model used, this list can
also contain less entries.
Select the interface or interfaces that correspond to those to which the inverters
that will be controlled are connected.
Relay section
Using this matrix certain shift factors cos (Phi) can be defined for certain relay
states of the ripple control receiver.
Four levels are shown in the basic setting. The "+" sign can be used to extend
the list by additional levels.
For each level, the input signal combination and a value for the shift factor in
cos (Phi) is entered.
In Chapter 6 of this manual several examples of ripple control receivers are
listed, along with their coupling with Solar Log™ PM+ and the respective
configuration matrix.
Configuration at a PC
Feed-in management for Solar Log™ PM+ (Extended / Feed-in Management)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 283 of 374
Variable shift factor section
If the requirement is for the network operator to be able to control the reactive
power control using a ripple control receiver to a certain cos (Phi) and to an
adjustment in the cos (Phi) using a characteristic curve, the desired level of
variable shift factor must be assigned using a characteristic curve.
The desired level is to be entered into the field.
Caution! Take care when combining two ripple control receivers!
If the ripple control receiver should be used in active power reduction
use binary signal coding (2 relays for 4 reduction levels), signal
feedback via the ripple control receiver for the reactive power must be
prevented by fitting diodes.
8.17.15 Networking (only Solar Log1000 PM+)
In order to provide feed-in management for large plants, there is the option to
operate the Solar Log1000
PM+ in a network with several Solar Log1000
units.
Function
The ripple control receiver's signals are received by the Solar Log1000
PM+
(master) and distributed to the connected inverters via the RS 485 bus.
In addition, switching commands from the energy supplier can be forwarded
from the Solar Log1000
PM+ (master) to other Solar Log1000
units which then, for
their part, switch on the connected inverters.
For this procedure the Solar Log1000
PM+ (master) is connected to up to 9 Solar
Log1000
(slave) units via the network (RJ45 wiring).
Configuration
In the Solar Log1000
PM+ (master) the IP addresses of the connected Solar
Log1000
(slave) units are entered and stored. Additional lines appear
automatically for more than 2 slaves.
Configuration at a PC
Feed-in management for Solar Log™ PM+ (Extended / Feed-in Management)
284 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Fields for entering the IP addresses of the Solar Log1000
(slave)
After restarting the Solar Log1000
(slave), the new menu entry "Remote-
controlled" appears under Configuration / Extended / Feed-in management.
The configuration of the feed-in management function for the inverters
connected to this slave Solar Log™ is performed as described in Chapter 3.3.
Principal design for controlling large plants
Configuration at a PC
Feed-in management for Solar Log™ PM+ (Extended / Feed-in Management)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 285 of 374
8.17.16 Diagnostic options for power management
Feed-in management acknowledgment signals are displayed via the Solar
LogTM
LEDs.
Operating status or fault message
LED E LED P Meaning and possible remedy
blinking blinking Undefined status of the PM+ interface
Check inputs or configuration
off blinking The Solar Log™ is regulating the
inverters, i.e. the active power
limitations are activated..
Solar Log1000
PM+
The PM diagnostic screen on the Solar Log1000 PM+ can be accessed under
Diagnostic/PM-Diagnostic.
The current power reduction as well as reactive power is displayed. If a Utility
Meter has been installed, the measured data is also displayed in this screen.
Configuration at a PC
Setting automatic/manual data backups (Internal/Backup)
286 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
8.18 Setting automatic/manual data backups (Internal/Backup)
This dialog box is used to set periodic data backups on an FTP server, or to
make an immediate backup on the local hard disk.
Data backups can also be restored on the Solar Log™.
Opening the dialog box
On the tab on the left, select Internal / backup
The following dialog box appears on the right:
Configuration at a PC
Setting automatic/manual data backups (Internal/Backup)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 287 of 374
This is divided into the following sections:
Data backup (automatic)
Data backup (manual)
Data correction
Data import
"Backup (automatically)" section
Periodic data backups can be configured on any homepage by FTP protocol.
The data backups include overall statistical data. Depending on the size of the
system, the data volume per backup is between 1 and 2 MB.
"Backup (manually)" section
If there is no Internet access, the data backup can be made manually. In this
case, the data are saved directly in the selected folder on the PC.
1 Click on Process data.
The data is formatted and a new link is displayed beside Process
data:
2 Click on Click here to save
Another box opens, in which you can select a location where the file is
to be saved.
Load data from hard disk
This is used to restore a previous data backup. This may be necessary, for
example, when installing a software update.
1 Click on Browse.
A box opens in which you can select the import file.
Note
When saving with Internet Explorer (Version 8 and older), select *txt as format
(Save under ). Then rename the file extension to .dat. (solarlog_backup.txt
solarlog_backup.dat)
Configuration at a PC
Manual data corrections
288 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
8.19 Manual data corrections
Here you can adjust the values for previous days or change daily totals.
1 The Date (on 8 digits): 2 digits for day, 2 digits for month and 2 digits for
the year, separating each by a decimal point
2 Enter Daily value in kWh
The daily value must correspond to the current meter reading, i.e. the real
daily value.
"Data import" section
An initial value can also be input to daily data already saved manually in Solar
LogTM
. This is useful any time that a large amount of data has to be saved at a
later time, and this would take too long with the "Data correction" function.
Data import deletes the existing data memory completely before the daily data
are imported. Therefore, the data import should be carried out as far as
possible immediately after the startup of Solar Log™.
A data import can only be made if all inverters have been correctly detected
and configured.
1 Before the data import, Solar Log™ asks for a user name and password.
Enter the following details:
User name: solarlog
Password: solarlog
2 Click on Browse.
A box opens in which you can select the import file.
3 Click on Load.
The data is being loaded.
Configuration at a PC
Manual data corrections
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 289 of 374
The import file must consist of individual rows of text, where the date and daily
yield value in "Wh" (not kWh!) are separated by semicolons (CSV format).
Example:
01.04.06;136435
02.04.06;128219
etc.
Note:Here, the year value should also consist of 4 digits.
Configuration at a PC
Managing system settings (Internal / System)
290 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
8.20 Managing system settings (Internal / System)
The system data consist of all the data that have been saved in the
configuration. It is recommended always to make a backup of the system data
before changing the configuration or updating the firmware.
Opening the dialog box
On the tab on the left, select Internal / System
The following dialog box appears on the right:
This is divided into the following sections:
System backup
System settings
Configuration
Configuration at a PC
Managing system settings (Internal / System)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 291 of 374
"System backup" section
1 Click on Process data.
The data is formatted and a new link is displayed beside Process
data:
2 Click on Click here to save
Another box opens, in which you can select a location where the file is
to be saved.
Loading system settings from hard disk
After a firmware update, it may be that all data are re-initialized (i.e. deleted).
In this case, following the firmware update, the first thing to do is to import a
system backup.
1 Before the data import, Solar Log™ asks for a user name and password.
Enter the following details:
User name: solarlog
Password: solarlog
2 Click on Browse.
A box opens in which you can select the import file.
3 Click on Load.
The data is being loaded.
"System settings" section
Solar Log™ has an integrated real-time clock which can maintain the clock
time even through a power failure or mains disconnection, and for a long
period (50 days). The save interval is set by Solar Log™ and depends on the
number of inverters.
When connected to the Internet, the time is also set automatically every day,
so that it should never be necessary to set the time manually. The switchover
to summertime can take place automatically.
However, if the date or time have been set incorrectly, they can be adjusted
here.
4 Set the display of currency, time and date format from the Select country
list.
5 Set the display language for the screen and the web browser from the
Select language list.
6 Enter Date and Time.
Example:
The input for 28/2/2009 17:31 would be: 28/02/09 17:31:00.
Configuration at a PC
Managing system settings (Internal / System)
292 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Current serial number, license key
Display fields: These show the Solar Log™ serial number and license key
if applicable. These values cannot be changed.
"Configuration" section
A password can be set in order to restrict access to the configuration area.
This password is then required at the initial access to the configuration
settings.
5 minutes after the last access to the configuration area, access is blocked
again and the user has to log in again.
In order to change the password:
7 Enable the Additional password query? option.
8 Enter the Old password
No password is set at delivery or if the default settings are restored, and in
this case nothing needs to be entered in Old password.
9 Enter the New password
10 Enter the same password again in Repeat password.
11 Click on Save.
Configuration at a PC
Updating the firmware (Internal / Update)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 293 of 374
8.21 Updating the firmware (Internal / Update)
Free firmware updates are available for the Solar-Log™ from our website.
During the initial installation of the Solar-Log™, Solare Datensysteme GmbH
recommends checking that the firmware is up to date.
Enabling the function "Automatic Firmware Update" allows Solare
Datensysteme GmbH the option to carry out firmware updates later via the
internet.
The automatic update function only pertains to official releases from Solare
Datensysteme GmbH—or in exceptional cases to those officially approved.
The Solar-Log™downloads the updates automatically via an existing internet
connection and installs them at night.
Note
This function does not serve as an alternative to checking the firmware
version and, as the case may be, manual firmware updates.
Opening the dialog box
On the tab on the left, select Internal / Update
The following dialog box appears on the right:
Updating the firmware
1 Before the data import, Solar Log™ asks for a user name and password.
Enter the following details:
User name: solarlog
Password: solarlog
2 Click on Browse.
Configuration at a PC
Updating the firmware (Internal / Update)
294 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
A box opens in which you can select the import file.
3 Click on Import.
The data is being loaded.
4 This is followed by queries that ask whether system and data backups
have been made. If you click "Cancel" on these queries, the process is
aborted.
Solar Log500: Configuration at the unit
Working with the keypad and display
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 295 of 374
9 Solar Log500: Configuration at the unit
The menu navigation for configuration at the unit is designed so that each item
and sub-item has to be worked through from the top downward (Page 296).
In this way, all the necessary configuration steps are processed in order.
9.1 Working with the keypad and display
In normal operation, the current values are shown at intervals on the initial 2-
line text display.
Depending on the mode (navigation or input), the actions that can be
performed at the keypad and 2-line display are limited to the following:
Mode Action Key
Navigation
Open the configuration menu on the initial screen Any key
Select menu item
Open the selected menu/submenu item ENTER
Go back one menu level (up to initial screen) ESC
Input
Enter a digit/letter at cursor position
Move cursor one digit forward/back
Save input/open a selection ENTER
Go back without saving/accept the input/selection ESC
Solar Log500: Configuration at the unit
Navigation overview
296 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
9.2 Navigation overview
ENTER key Easy Install Inverter detection Yes/No
System Language <List of Languages>
Country <List of Countries>
Date/Time Time zone
Date
Time
Large display Display S0
Display RS485
Network Automatic
Manual IP address
Subnet mask
Gateway
DNS server
Inverter Bluetooth *)
RS485/422 <Inverter List>
S0 meter None
Consumption
Inverter
Total yield
Detection
Internet Data export Inactive
Active
Solar Log WEB Full Service
Classic-2nd
Ed.
Self Made
Classic-1stEd.
Server
Users
Password
Interval 1 hour … 8 hours per day
Connection test
Internal Reset Delete data
Delete inverter
Default.
PIN lock Inactive *) available only on Solar Log
500 BT Active
Solar Log500: Configuration at the unit
Configuring system settings ("System" menu)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 297 of 374
9.3 Configuring system settings ("System" menu)
Under System settings the following settings are made:
Display language
Date and time
Settings for large display
9.3.1 Setting the display language (System / Language)
The selected display language applies both to the display and the web
browser.
1 Select System / Language from the menu.
2 Select the desired display language from the list.
3 Press ENTER to save.
9.3.2 Setting the date, time and currency format (System / Country)
The country setting affects how the date, time and currency formats are
displayed.
1 Select System / Country from the menu.
2 Select the desired country from the list.
3 Press ENTER to save.
9.3.3 Adjusting the Date/Time (System / Date/Time)
The clock time is factory-set, but it may be lost due to long periods of storage.
The time zone, date and summertime values must be set correctly, so that no
incorrect statuses or results are obtained during monitoring and graph display,
e.g. when e-mail messages are sent or when a curve is displayed on the day
graph.
Any incorrect settings can be corrected in the "Date/Time" submenu.
Correcting the time zone
1 Select System/Date/Time / Time zone from the menu.
2 Enter the time difference in hours (default is GMT +1).
3 Press ENTER to save.
Correcting the date
1 Select System/Date/Time / Date from the menu.
2 Adjust the date.
3 Press ENTER to save.
Correcting the time
1 Select System/Date/Time / Time from the menu.
2 Adjust the time.
Solar Log500: Configuration at the unit
Configuring system settings ("System" menu)
298 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
3 Press ENTER to save.
9.3.4 Configuring a large display (System / Large display)
Large displays can be connected to the Solar Log500
using 2 different
technologies.
Through the S0 pulse output
Through the RS485 (recommended)
It is recommended to use the RS485 connection, as in this case the numerical
values in Solar Log™ are synchronized with the values shown on the display.
If certain inverters are used (Fronius, Eaton/Sunville), however, the S0
interface must be used since parallel operation is not possible.
In this case, data on the large display can only be used correctly if inverter
configuration has been completed and the inverters are feeding in.
Setting the display on the S0 output
1 Select System/Large display/Display S0 from the menu.
2 Enter the pulse factor.
The pulse factor must match that of the display (Default: 1000).
3 Press ENTER to save.
Setting the display on RS485
1 Select System/Large display/Display RS485 from the menu
2 Enter the pulse factor
The pulse factor must match that of the display (Default: 1000).
3 Press ENTER to save.
If no inverters are configured on the RS485 interface (e.g. in Bluetooth mode),
the Solar Log500
transmits at 9600 Baud, 8N1.
Solar Log500: Configuration at the unit
Configuring network settings ("Network" menu)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 299 of 374
9.4 Configuring network settings ("Network" menu)
The network configuration, i.e. allocation of an IP address for the local
network, can be performed either automatically or manually.
9.4.1 Obtain an IP address automatically (Network / Automatic)
For automatic configuration, the Solar Log500
must be connected to an Internet
router which has the automatic network addressing service (DHCP). All
routers are usually pre-configured to attempt automatic detection first.
1 Select Network/Automatic/Yes from the menu.
2 Press ENTER to start searching for an IP address.
When the search is started, the Solar Log™ attempts to obtain an IP
address through an Internet router. This can take up to 60 seconds.
If an IP address has been obtained for Solar Log500
, it is shown on the
display. All other settings, such as Subnet Mask, Gateway and DNS Server
if necessary, are also entered automatically.
Take note of the address. This address is used for accessing from a PC
later.
3 Press ENTER to save.
9.4.2 Setting an IP address manually (Network / Manual)
If the Solar Log500
is not connected to a router, or if the DHCP server is
disabled in the router, the network configuration must be carried out manually.
The default address is 192.168.178.49 and can be adapted only through a
direct PC connection, or through a router without the DHCP service, in order
to allow access from the PC.
In this case, please consult a network specialist who can assign a suitable
network address, make the other gateway settings, and so on.
Setting the IP address manually
1 Select Network/Manual/IP address from the menu.
2 Enter the IP address.
This address is used for accessing from a PC later.
3 Press ENTER to save.
Entering the Subnet Mask
1 Select Network/Manual/Subnet Mask from the menu.
2 Enter the Subnet Mask.
The Subnet Mask is the same for all devices on the network.
3 Press ENTER to save.
Solar Log500: Configuration at the unit
Configuring the inverter data ("Inverter" menu)
300 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Entering the gateway
The gateway is the router to which Solar Log500
is connected. Its IP address is
entered here automatically, if the DHCP service is enabled on the router.
1 Select Network/Manual/Gateway from the menu.
2 Enter the IP address of the router.
This IP address is the same for all devices on the network.
3 Press ENTER to save.
Switching the DNS Server on/off
In some networks, the DNS server is a separate address for resolving Internet
addresses, and is not the same as the Internet router (gateway).
1 Select Network/Manual/DNS server from the menu.
2 Yes or No depending on whether a DNS server is to be used.
3 Press ENTER to save.
If Yes has been selected,
4 Enter the IP address of the DNS server
5 Press ENTER to save.
9.5 Configuring the inverter data ("Inverter" menu)
In this configuration step the inverters used can be allocated to the Solar
Log500
interfaces and inverter detection can be carried out.
9.5.1 Inverter selection for Bluetooth (Inverter / Bluetooth)
Note
This menu item appears only in Solar Log500
BT models with integrated
Bluetooth module.
Activate the Bluetooth function only if the Solar Log™ is to communicate
wirelessly with the SMA-SB 3000/4000/5000-20.
1 Select Inverter/Bluetooth from the menu.
2 Activate Bluetooth functionality
3 Press ENTER to save.
If other inverters are to be configured, select the corresponding interface
and assign the inverter to it.
4 To complete the inverter configuration, perform inverter detection (Page
302).
9.5.2 Inverter selection on RS485/422 B interface (Inverter / RS485/422)
Parallel operation of Bluetooth and RS485/422 is possible with SMA inverters.
1 Select Inverter/RS485/422 from the menu.
2 Select SMA as the inverter manufacturer.
Solar Log500: Configuration at the unit
Configuring the inverter data ("Inverter" menu)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 301 of 374
3 Press ENTER to save.
If other inverters are to be configured, select the corresponding interface
and assign the inverter to it.
4 To complete the inverter configuration, perform inverter detection (Page
302).
9.5.3 Configuring the power meter on the S0 input (Inverter / S0 meter)
If an external S0 power meter is used, it must be activated here.
The S0 meter can be configured flexibly and used in 3 modes:
as the power meter for an inverter
(In inverter mode, the meter can read an inverter for which the data
protocol is not supported.)
to meter the yield of the entire system
as a consumption meter.
1 Select Inverter/S0 meter from the menu.
2 Select a mode: Consumption, Inverter or Total yield
The pulse factor must then be set to match the pulse factor of the meter.
3 Enter the appropriate pulse factor.
4 Press ENTER to save.
Solar Log500: Configuration at the unit
Configuring the inverter data ("Inverter" menu)
302 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
9.5.4 Perform inverter detection (Inverter / Detection)
Inverter detection can be started here. To be detected, the inverters must be
feeding in power.
1 Select Inverter/ Detection/Yes from the menu.
Provided they have been activated, the individual interfaces of the Solar
Log500
are queried in order:
– Bluetooth
First, all SMA Bluetooth interfaces are shown in a list. Since more
inverters may be detected than are actually installed (e.g. those in a
neighboring house may also be detected), the listed inverters have to
be checked.
– RS485/422
– S0 meter
The meter must send at least 1 pulse within 60 seconds.
During detection, the inverters that have been detected are displayed
immediately. Detection can take some time. "Channel lists" are loaded for
SMA inverters. This can take several minutes for each inverter.
After inverter detection, the total number of inverters detected is displayed.
2 Delete Bluetooth inverters from the list:
Select inverters and press ENTER.
If the selection is correct, press ESC.
Inverter detection can be repeated at any time, or cancelled completely.
Re-detecting inverters
If new inverters have been added to the system or, for example, SMA
inverters have been replaced, it will also be necessary to carry out a new
detection (Page 233). This will not cause any loss of data, as Solar
Log500
automatically re-formats the data. However, before running a new
detection, it is essential to make a data backup at the PC and restore the
backup afterwards if necessary.
Solar Log500: Configuration at the unit
Configuring the Internet data ("Internet" menu)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 303 of 374
9.6 Configuring the Internet data ("Internet" menu)
So that the Solar Log™ can send data over the Internet and/or to the web site
(Page 370), it must be connected to an Internet router and network
configuration must be completed.
9.6.1 Setting automatic data exports (Internet / Data export)
Here, automatic exports of Solar Log500
data to the homepage or through the
gateway can be switched on or off.
1 Select Internet/Data export from the menu.
2 Select Active to switch on automatic export (or Inactive to switch off).
3 Press ENTER to save.
9.6.2 Setting the Internet gateway (Internet / Solar Log WEB)
Here you set the type of Solar-Log homepage; for more information about the
homepage Page 370.
1 Select Internet/Solar-Log WEB from the menu.
2 Select Full Service, Classic-2nd
Edition, Self Made or Classic-1st
Edition.
3 Press ENTER to save.
9.6.3 Server definition (Internet / Server)
Here you enter the name of the server name for the homepage to which Solar
Log500
is to transfer the data.
1 Select Internet/Server from the menu.
2 Enter the server name (default: home.solarlog-web.de)
3 Press ENTER to save.
9.6.4 Entering a user name (Internet / User)
Here you enter the user name for the homepage to which Solar Log500
is to
transfer the data.
1 Select Internet/User from the menu.
2 Enter the user name.
3 Press ENTER to save.
Solar Log500: Configuration at the unit
Configuring the Internet data ("Internet" menu)
304 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
9.6.5 Setting a password (Internet / Password)
Here you enter the password for the homepage to which Solar Log500
is to
transfer the data.
1 Select Internet/Password from the menu.
2 Enter a password
3 Press ENTER to save.
9.6.6 Intervals for transferring data to the homepage (Internet / Interval)
Here you enter the interval at which Solar Log500
is to automatically send data
for the homepage.
1 Select Internet/Interval from the menu.
2 Select the desired interval
(1 hr., 2 hrs., 4 hrs., 8 hrs. or once daily)
3 Press ENTER to save.
9.6.7 Test transmission (Internet / Connection test)
The transmission test allows you to check whether the settings have been
made correctly and data transfers are working over the Internet. The test
transmission only sends a small file, in order to reduce the transfer time and
therefore the waiting time.
1 Select Internet/Connection from the menu.
2 Yes to start the test transmission.
If a fault is detected, a fault code is displayed; Page 358.
In this case, check the settings then repeat the test transmission as often
as necessary until an OK message is displayed.
3 Press ESC to end the test.
Solar Log500: Configuration at the unit
Internal settings, deleting and PIN lock functions ("Internal" menu)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 305 of 374
9.7 Internal settings, deleting and PIN lock functions ("Internal" menu)
This menu can be used to carry out delete and security functions.
9.7.1 Reset (Internal / Reset)
Using the menus on the unit, there are 3 ways of resetting the Solar Log500
:
Delete data
In certain circumstances after an inverter detection, it may occur that
incorrect or unusable data are displayed. In this case, the stored can be
deleted without having to reconfigure the Solar Log500
completely.
Delete inverter
If another inverter detection has to be started, it is possible to delete the
inverter data only, without having to delete the rest of the configuration.
Restore factory settings
This is used to reset the unit more or less to its as-delivered state (Page
363). The network configuration remains unaffected.
1 Select Internal/Reset from the menu.
2 Select Delete data, Delete inverter or Factory settings.
3 Select Yes.
9.7.2 PIN lock (Internal / PIN lock)
Here, a 4 digit PIN code can be entered to restrict access to the configuration
menu on the Solar Log500
display.
This PIN code has no effect on the operation through the web browser. This
can be protected separately.
1 Select Internet/PIN lock from the menu.
2 Select Active (select Inactive to remove the PIN lock.)
3 Enter a 4-digit PIN code
4 Press ENTER to save.
For the PIN lock to become active, the Solar Log500
needs to be re-started.
After it is up and running, the PIN code is then required in order to open the
configuration menu.
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Working with the touchscreen
306 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
10 Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
10.1 Working with the touchscreen
The display on the Solar Log1000
consists of a touchscreen, which is operated
by touching the appropriate control element with the finger.
Initial screen: Overview screen
On the initial screen in normal operation, the unit display gives an overview of
system information, with the date, time, the connected inverters, and various
measurements and calculation data.
Touch any part of the screen (or any unused space on the graphic display)
to open the main menu.
10.1.1 Main menu – Configuration menu
The main menu contains 4 menu headings, the Config. configuration menu
contains the following submenu items:
Touch a submenu item to open the related configuration dialog.
Note
This manual describes only the menu items under Config.for the
configuration. (Depending on the equipment variant, the items in this menu
may differ slightly from those in the figure.)
The other menu items are explained in the user manual.
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Working with the touchscreen
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 307 of 374
10.1.2 Control elements in the configuration dialog boxes
Buttons
Buttons are the elements with rounded corners.
Action Button at the bottom edge of the display
Show main menu Menu or an empty space on the display
Save the settings in the dialog box Save
Go to next dialog Next during a dialog sequence
Go back to previous dialog Back during a dialog sequence
Buttons inside a dialog box
Show selection list e.g. Overall system (see above)
Start test transmission e.g. Test SMS
Selection lists
Action – list on left Touch the control element
Scroll list upward ^
Scroll list downward V
Select list item Touch list item
Confirm selection and open in the dialog box Select
Return to dialog without selecting Cancel
Action – list on right
Confirm selection and open in the dialog box Back
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Working with the touchscreen
308 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Input boxes
Input boxes have square corners:
Touching an input box opens the virtual keypad.
Virtual keyboard
When an input box is touched, another input screen in which text or numbers,
are entered, i.e. a virtual keyboard.
Action Touch the control element
Delete one character backwards <–
Clear all contents of an input box C
Switch between upper and lower case letters Shift
Confirm input and open in the dialog box OK
Return to dialog without making changes Cancel
Option fields
Option fields give a number of options, one of which has to be enabled.
Action Touch the control element
Enable the option (simple selection)
One of the options must be enabled
Disable the option
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Working with the touchscreen
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 309 of 374
Check boxes
With check boxes, you can enable one, or several, or none of the options.
Action Control element
Enable the option (multiple selections allowed)
Disable the option (complete de-selection allowed)
Confirmation dialog box
The confirmation dialog box opens if you exit a dialog without saving the
settings.
Action Control element
Save all settings in the dialog box Yes
Dismiss all settings in the dialog box No
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Overview of configuration menu navigation "Config."
310 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
10.2 Overview of configuration menu navigation "Config."
Config. Start Initial configuration
Inverter detection
Easy Installation
Basic Network
WLAN *)
Plant groups
Inverter
Forecast
Internet Basic settings
E-mail/SMS
WEB
Advanced Plant monitoring
Large display
Alarm contact
RS485 wireless package
External switch
Internal Data correction
System
Firmware
Language settings
Country setting
*)only Solar Log™ WiFi
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Performing the initial configuration (Config. / Start / Initial configuration)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 311 of 374
10.3 Performing the initial configuration (Config. / Start / Initial configuration)
The "Initial configuration" menu is opened automatically at the initial startup.
However, it can be opened again at any time afterwards.
The initial configuration is made through dialog boxes:
Time settings and IP address
Inverter selection
Power meter on S0 input
Performing inverter detection (Config. / Start / Inverter detection)
To open the initial configuration:
Select Config./Start/Initial configuration from the menu.
The time setting and IP address are displayed in the dialog box.
10.3.1 Time settings and IP address
Dialog boxes
System settings
Time zone, Date/Time and Summertime setting
The clock time is factory-set, but it may be lost due to long periods of
storage.
The time zone, date and summertime (day light savings) values must be
set correctly, so that no incorrect statuses or results are obtained during
monitoring and graph display, e.g. when e-mail messages are sent or when
displaying a curve on the daily graph.
Network settings
– IP Address
In general, the IP address only needs to be changed or checked if Solar
Log1000
is to be connected to a router without the DHCP service, or
connected directly to a PC.
The IP address is factory-set to 192.168.178.49, and this can be
changed here to a network address which is appropriate for the local
network.
After saving, the Solar Log1000
.restarts automatically
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Performing the initial configuration (Config. / Start / Initial configuration)
312 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
– Obtain IP address automatically
The IP address can be obtained automatically if Solar Log1000
is
connected to an Internet router which provides the DHCP service.
After saving and the automatic restart, the new IP address is displayed
accordingly. The Solar Log1000
can now be reached at this address and
it has automatic access to the Internet.
Procedure
1 Enter all the related data (see above list)
2 Touch Save and then Next to go to the next dialog.
10.3.2 Inverter selection
In the inverter selection, manufacturers of the inverters connected to Solar
Log1000
can be selected and assigned to all interfaces through a series of
dialog boxes.
Inverter selection order:
– RS485-A
– RS485/422-B
Sensor (only with RS485-A and RS485/422-B):
The MT SensorBox is treated like an inverter and is therefore marked
as a MT&Sensor type (when selecting the inverters on RS485-A and
RS485/422-B).
– CAN
– Network
– S0
The inverter selection dialog boxes are structured differently depending on
the interface.
Procedure
1 Touch Please choose
A list of inverters is displayed for selection:
2 Touch Select to select and assign an inverter.
If no interface is assigned, select None.
3 After each inverter selection, touch Save and then Next to go to the next
dialog.
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Performing the initial configuration (Config. / Start / Initial configuration)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 313 of 374
10.3.3 Power meter on S0 input
This can be used to activate a power meter if there is one connected to the S0
input, or exclude it if none is connected.
The power meter is managed by Solar Log1000
as a virtual inverter. It is
assigned the number 1, and all other 'real' inverters are numbered starting
from there.
1 Touch Yes (= Activate input) or No (= Deactivate input).
2 Touch Save and then Next to go to the next dialog.
Inverter detection
As the initial configuration is intended to provide a quick way of getting the
system up and running, the "Inverter detection" dialog can be opened directly
here (Seite 314).
Procedure
Touch Go to inverter detection
or
If inverter detection is to be performed at a later time using the Inverter
detection menu item, the settings made up to this point can be saved:
Touch Save.
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Performing inverter detection (Config. / Start / Inverter detection)
314 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
10.4 Performing inverter detection (Config. / Start / Inverter detection)
Inverter detection is used to detect all inverters connected to Solar Log1000
and
assign them to the address numbers defined during inverter selection in the
"Initial configuration" dialog.
The number and types of the devices are detected automatically, and memory
allocation in Solar Log1000
is optimized to make data storage as permanent as
possible.
If the number of inverters changes, the internal database needs to be
restructured, and this can be a lengthy process depending on the amount of
data already stored.
The "Inverter detection" menu is opened automatically after the initial startup
and the initial configuration. However, it can be opened again at any time
afterwards.
Procedure
Select Config./Start/Inverter detection from the menu.
For the initial detection, the following dialog box is opened.
Touch Start
The following overview screen then appears.
All interfaces are scanned one after the other and any inverters found are
listed under the predefined inverter types. This process can last different
lengths of time depending on the inverters connected.
Important: For inverter detection, all inverters must be active. Detection
cannot therefore be carried out after dark.
After detection is complete, the number of inverters detected should be
checked in the list. If an inverter is missing, check the inverter setting and the
wiring (Section 4) and repeat the detection process.
The other settings in the inverter configuration should be made only after all
inverters have been successfully detected.
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Changing the network settings (Basic / Network)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 315 of 374
If no inverters have been detected, this is also indicated on the display. In this
case, the detection process must be repeated.
Once detection has been completed successfully, you are asked whether
inverter configuration (Page325) is to be carried out.
If all inverters have been detected,
Confirm with by selecting Yes.
The "Configure inverter data" dialog box is opened (Page325).
10.5 Changing the network settings (Basic / Network)
Configuring the network settings – if this is necessary after the initial
configuration – covers the following points:
Changing the network access
Changing the DHCP settings
Settings for analog modem
Settings for GPRS modem
Solar Log1000
WiFi: WLAN configuration (Basic/WLAN)
To configure the basic network settings:
Select Config./Basic Network from the menu.
10.5.1 Changing the network access
Here, the IP address and Subnet mask of the Solar Log1000
can be configured
if necessary.
However, all routers with the DHCP service enabled are pre-set so that this
data is entered automatically:
Dialog boxes
IP Address, Subnet Mask
The default address is 192.168.178.49 and can be adapted only through a
direct PC connection, or through a router without the DHCP service, in
order to allow access from the PC.
In this case, please consult a network specialist who can assign a suitable
network address, make the other gateway settings, and so on.
Internet access
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Changing the network settings (Basic / Network)
316 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
– None
The Solar Log1000
can only be accessed locally, i.e. through a direct PC
connection or through a network router without Internet access.
– Network router
The Internet is accessed through an Internet router. The Internet router
must be connected to the network interface of Solar Log1000
. This router
handles all dial up access and data transfers over the Internet. A DSL,
cable modem or wireless router can be connected.
The important thing is that Internet dial up should always be possible
from the Solar Log1000
. The Internet router should not be switched off,
otherwise ordinary messaging will no longer possible when there is a
fault and the homepage will not be correctly supplied with data.
– Analog modem
Internet access is provided by the analog modem package (Page 195)
and using an analog telephone connection; this is configured in a later
dialog box.
– GPRS modem
Internet access is provided by the mobile communications package
(Page 196) or in Solar Log1000
GPRS (Page 14) through the mobile
phone network; this is configured in a later dialog box.
Procedure
1 Enable the desired option
2 Touch the input boxes beside IP Address and Subnet Mask.
The virtual keyboard is displayed.
3 Enter the relevant data and touch OK to confirm.
4 Touch Save and then Next to go to the next dialog.
10.5.2 Changing the DHCP settings
The DHCP Service on the router must be activated here. The DNS server can
also be defined.
Dialog boxes
Network router
– Obtain IP address automatically
The IP address can be obtained automatically if Solar Log1000
is
connected to an Internet router which provides the DHCP service.
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Changing the network settings (Basic / Network)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 317 of 374
After saving and the automatic restart, the new IP address is displayed
accordingly. The Solar Log1000
can now be reached at this address and
it has automatic access to the Internet.
– Gateway
The gateway is the router to which Solar Log1000
is connected. Its IP
address is entered here automatically, if the DHCP service is enabled
on the router.
Alternate DNS server
In some networks, the DNS server is a separate address for resolving
Internet addresses, and is not the same as the Internet router (gateway).
In this case, tick the check box and enter the IP address of the DNS server.
Procedure
1 Enter all the related data (see above list)
2 Touch Save and then Next to go to the next dialog.
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Changing the network settings (Basic / Network)
318 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
10.5.3 Settings for analog modem
If Internet access by analog modem has been selected, the access data of the
telephone service provider must be entered here.
Dialog boxes
Internet-by-call No., user name, password
This is pre-set to Internet-by-call access through Arcor. This can be
modified as necessary.
Pre-dial "0".
In certain telephone systems, a "0" has to be dialed before dialing the
actual telephone number.
Dial tone Off
In a standard modem, the dialing process is audible; this provides a good
initial testing function until the connection is established. The dial tone can
then be switched off.
If there are problems with the Internet connection, the best solution is to
check the line with a conventional telephone to determine whether the
telephone connection is working or is disconnected. In this way, you can
find out quickly and easily whether it is necessary to pre-dial "0".
Allow dial in
Solar Log1000
generally allows dial up if an analog modem is used. This
means that the Solar Log1000
can be dialed up from outside using a PC and
another modem, if this has been enabled.
Password
The factory-set password is "solarlog" - this should be changed.
Procedure
1 Enter all the related data (see above list)
2 Touch Save and then Next to go to the next dialog.
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Changing the network settings (Basic / Network)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 319 of 374
10.5.4 Settings for GPRS modem
In many cases where no DSL or telephone connection is available, a mobile
phone connection to the Internet is the only option for sending e-mails, text
messages (SMS) and data over the Internet to the homepage.
All data are factory-configured for the German networks; but it is simple to
select your own network from a PC (Page 225).
Other networks can be detected by entering the APN, user name and
password. Please contact your mobile service provider for the appropriate
information.
Dialog boxes
Enter the following configuration information here; this information can be
obtained from your mobile service provider:
APN
APN (Access Point Name) of the mobile service provider
Users
User name for your mobile phone account
Password
Password for the mobile phone account
SIM PIN code
PIN number of the SIM card
Procedure
1 Enter all the related data (see above list)
The mobile service provider recommends leaving the user name and
password empty; however, sometimes it is necessary to type in some text
in order to establish the data connection successfully.
2 Touch Save and then Next to go to the next dialog.
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Changing the network settings (Basic / Network)
320 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Setting options and testing the GPRS modem connection
Dialog boxes
Test field strength
If the network connection has been set up through a GPRS modem, this
button can be used to test the connection and the signal quality.
Always stay online
If this option is enabled, the modem remains online continuously. Only
useAlways stay online if you are using an appropriate mobile
communication tariff contract.
Caution: If you use this option and do not have a suitable mobile phone
contract, the charges can be very high.
Text message (SMS) directly over modem
If this option is enabled, text messages (SMS) are sent and billed directly
through the SIM card. Alternatively, text messages (SMS) can be sent
through an text messages (SMS) provider. See SMS
Procedure
1 First, touch Test field strength.
A box opens and indicates the signal quality:
2 Touch Back to close the test window.
3 Touch Save.
4 Enable the desired option(s) Always stay online and/or
SMS directly over modem.
5 Touch Save.
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Solar Log1000 WiFi: WLAN configuration (Basic/WLAN)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 321 of 374
10.6 Solar Log1000 WiFi: WLAN configuration (Basic/WLAN)
Dialog boxes
Activate WiFi
This check box can be used to switch WiFi access on or off.
Choose network
This button is used to initiate a search for wireless networks.
Network Name
The name of the network is entered here. If the network name is hidden
("Hidden SSID"), the Access Point is not displayed by the network scan. In
this case, the network name must be entered manually.
Encryption
If the network name is hidden ("Hidden SSID"), the encryption type is not
displayed by the network scan. In this case, it must be entered manually.
Possible encryption types:
TKIP, AES, WEP 64/128, WPA2 EAP-TLS, WPA2-PSK
Manual
This button opens an input box where you can enter the encryption type
manually.
Network key
Enter the network key here.
Connection test
Use this button to start testing the WiFi reception quality.
Procedure
1 Touch Activate WiFi, then Choose network, to start the network scan.
A list of the detected networks is displayed for selection.
2 Select the desired network from the list and touch Select to configure it.
3 Enter all the related data (see above list)
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Solar Log1000 WiFi: WLAN configuration (Basic/WLAN)
322 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
4 Touch Test transmission.
A window opens and shows the reception quality.
5 Touch Back to close the test window.
6 Touch Save and then Next to go to the next dialog.
IP settings for WiFi operation
Dialog boxes
Obtain automatically (DHCP)
The IP address can be obtained automatically if Solar Log1000
is connected
to an Internet router which allows the DHCP service.
After saving and the automatic restart, the new IP address is displayed.
The Solar Log1000
can now be reached at this address and it has automatic
access to the Internet.
All routers usually come with the DHCP service enabled, so that all the
subsequent data are entered automatically:
– IP Address, Subnet Mask
Here, the IP address and Subnet mask of the Solar Log1000
can be
configured if necessary.
However, all routers with the DHCP service enabled are pre-set so that
this data is entered automatically.
The default address is 192.168.178.49 and can be adapted only
through a direct PC connection, or through a router without the DHCP
service, in order to allow access from the PC.
In this case, please consult a network specialist who can assign a
suitable network address, make the other gateway settings, and so on.
– Gateway
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Defining plant groups (Basic / Plant Groups)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 323 of 374
The gateway is the router to which Solar Log1000
is connected. Its IP
address is entered here automatically, if the DHCP service is enabled
on the router.
– DNS server
In some networks, the DNS server is a separate address for resolving
Internet addresses, and is not the same as the Internet router
(gateway).
In this case, tick the check box and enter the IP address of the DNS
server.
Procedure
1 Enter all the related data (see above list)
2 Touch Save.
10.7 Defining plant groups (Basic / Plant Groups)
As the Solar Log1000
can manage up to 100 inverters at the same time, it is
helpful to divide these into groups. To provide a clearer overview, these
groups are then shown in all selection dialog boxes.
Up to 10 plant groups can be defined, each containing up to15 inverters:
Each system group can also be shown on a special large display (Page
345).
However, individual inverters can still be selected from the group concerned.
Select Config./Basic/Groups from the menu.
A dialog box opens for defining the plant groups.
Dialog boxes
All inverters belong to one plant.
If this option is enabled, the inverters are not divided into groups and can
be accessed individually.
Inverters are divided into groups
If this option is enabled, one or more groups have to be defined.
Procedure
1 Enable the desired option (see above list).
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Defining plant groups (Basic / Plant Groups)
324 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
2 To define groups
(Option Inverters are divided into groups has been activated):
Touch Group definition.
A selection list is displayed.
3 Select a group and touch Back to continue.
The "Plant group" sub dialog box opens.
The bottom area shows a list of the inverters already assigned.
4 Touch Add to select from the inverters list, then touch Back to close the
list.
5 Under Name you can change the name of the group using the virtual
keyboard, then confirm with OK.
6 In the "Plant group" sub dialog box, touch Back.
7 Define any other groups required in the initial dialog
8 When all groups have been defined, touch Save the initial dialog box.
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Configuring the inverter data (Basic / Inverter)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 325 of 374
10.8 Configuring the inverter data (Basic / Inverter)
Inverter configuration consists of a number of sub dialog boxes, but only the
first two are important for the initial configuration.
The other settings are related to plant monitoring and graph scaling, which are
already pre-set with realistic values. Nothing usually needs to be changed
here.
The following individual dialogs are available for inverter configuration:
Changing the inverter data
Assigning a new number
(only for inverters without their own addressing function)
Changing the name
Entering a pulse factor (only for S0 meter)
Setting the S0 meter (only or S0 meter)
Setting the module and power data
Configuring the monitoring
Configuring the graph display
All the dialog boxes apply only to the inverters that have been selected.
1 Select Config./Basic/Inverter from the menu.
A dialog box opens for selecting the inverters.
2 To select an inverter, touch the corresponding Number.
A list of the inverters available in the initial configuration is displayed.
3 Select the desired inverter, then confirm with Select.
Changing the inverter data
Note
The entries in the inverter configuration dialog boxes shown in the above
example will differ according to the inverter and the interface.
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Configuring the inverter data (Basic / Inverter)
326 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Dialog boxes
Number
Indicates the internal position at which the inverter (or plant group) was
detected.
New number
Input box for entering a new number.
Unit name, Address / Serial number
Display fields only, not editable: the internal device name of the inverter.
The device designation and serial number are read off automatically for
most manufacturers. In the case of other inverter manufacturers, the
communication address is displayed.
Pulse factor (only when selecting an S0 meter)
In the default setting, Solar Log1000
sends 1000 pulses/kWh over the S0
output. The pulse factor must be configured to match the pulse factor of the
meter.
Name
Short description of the inverter.
Assigning a new number
(only for inverters without their own addressing function)
Inverters that do not have the ability to set their own communication address,
e.g. SMA and Kyocera / PowerLynx, are listed in random order or in the
ascending order of their serial numbers.
This order should then be changed to the actual installed order.
The order should be changed immediately after inverter detection, as the data
relating to the inverter cannot be deleted or switched to the new number
afterwards.
Procedure
To assign a new number:
1 Touch the new number box beside New Number.
The virtual keyboard is displayed.
2 Enter the desired communication address and confirm with OK.
Changing the name
You should always change the name, or at least check the displayed names.
You should choose a name that is unique and meaningful, as the it will be
appearing in numerous selection lists and displays.
Procedure
In order to change the inverter name:
1 Touch the input box beside Name.
The virtual keyboard is displayed.
2 Enter the desired name and confirm with OK.
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Configuring the inverter data (Basic / Inverter)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 327 of 374
3 Touch Save and then Next to go to the next dialog.
Entering a pulse factor (only for S0 meter)
In the standard setting, most meters send 1000 pulses/kWh over the S0
output. The pulse factor of the Solar Log™ must be adapted to the pulse
factor of the connected meter.
Note
The pulse factor of Solar Log1000
and of the S0 meter must be set to the same
value.
Procedure
In order to change the pulse factor:
1 Touch the number box beside Pulse factor.
The virtual keyboard is displayed.
2 Enter the desired pulse factor and confirm with OK.
3 Touch Save and then Next to go to the next dialog.
Setting the S0 meter
This sub dialog box is available only if a power meter is connected to Solar
Log1000
and has been selected.
Dialog boxes
The S0 meter is flexible and can be set in 3 modes:
– in Inverter mode for inverters with data protocols that are not
supported
– as Overall yield meter to count the total output from the entire plant
– as Consumption meter to calculate the system's own consumption
rate.
Connected module power
A value for the connected module power is needed in inverter mode, in
order to make power comparisons between the different inverters and
offset them against each other.
Module field (1-9)
In the module field, the same types of strings are placed together for plant
monitoring and to be monitored together. For a roof with equal modules,
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Configuring the inverter data (Basic / Inverter)
328 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
which have the same alignment and the same angle of inclination on the
roof, all strings are assigned to module field "1". If there are other inverters
connected, which are operating with a different roof alignment, these
strings are given the module field number "2" etc.
Procedure
1 Enable required mode Inverter mode, Overall yield meter or
Consumption meter.
2 Touch the input box at Connected module power
The virtual keyboard is displayed.
3 Enter the desired module power and confirm with OK.
4 Touch the input box beside Module field.
The virtual keyboard is displayed.
5 Enter the number of the module field and confirm with OK.
6 Touch Save and then Next to go to the next dialog.
Setting the module and power data
Dialog for standard inverters
In standard inverters, the individual strings are interconnected internally.
Dialog boxes
Connected module power
A value for the connected module power at the inverter is needed in order
to make power comparisons between the different inverters and offset
them against each other.
Module field (1-9)
In the module field, the same types of strings are placed together for plant
monitoring and to be monitored together. For a roof with equal modules,
which have the same alignment and the same angle of inclination on the
roof, all strings are assigned to module field "1". If there are other inverters
connected, which are operating with a different roof alignment, these
strings are given the module field number "2" etc.
Procedure
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Configuring the inverter data (Basic / Inverter)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 329 of 374
In order to set the module and power data:
1 Touch the input box at Connected module power
The virtual keyboard is displayed.
2 Enter the desired module power and confirm with OK.
3 Touch the input box beside Module field.
The virtual keyboard is displayed.
4 Enter the number of the module field and confirm with OK.
5 Touch Save and then Next to go to the next dialog.
Dialog for multi-string inverters
Dialog boxes
String
Display field only, not editable: Module string numbers
Module field
Module field numbers can be used to assign the same types of strings or
inverters. In the plant monitoring, only strings or inverters with the same
module field number are offset against each other.
Each connected string is allocated to a module field. Module fields are
subdivided according to solar module type, angles of inclination and
alignment. If all modules within a system are of the same type and have
the same alignment, only one module field, e.g. "1", is defined. Strings not
used must be switched off (switched to "0"),
Other module fields must be defined for modules with different alignments.
Each field is made up of at least two individual strings, which monitor each
other.
Example:
A plant with 23.6 kWp is divided into 3 × SMA SB5000TL and 2 × SMA
SB2500.
18 kWp is located on a barn roof with 30° inclination, 20° South-East
deviation, and 5 kWp on an adjoining garage roof, 32° inclination, 0° South
deviation.
Location Inverter String power Module field
Barn 1.SB5000TL 2000 1
Barn 1.SB5000TL 2000 1
Barn 1.SB5000TL 2200 1
Barn 2.SB5000TL 2000 1
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Configuring the inverter data (Basic / Inverter)
330 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Barn 2.SB5000TL 2000 1
Barn 2.SB5000TL 2200 1
Barn 3.SB5000TL 2000 1
Barn 3.SB5000TL 2000 1
Barn 3.SB5000TL 2200 1
Garage 1.SB2500 2500 2
Garage 2.SB2500 2500 2
All connected strings allow mutual monitoring, the strings in module field 1
allow multiple monitoring, and the two strings in module field 2 mutual
monitoring.
Connected module power
For inverters or strings (in multi-string inverters only), the connected
module power must be indicated in the exact total module power.
Example: 28 × 160 Watt modules = 4480
Name
The name of the string that is shown on the homepage or PC view (for
multi-string inverters only).
Procedure
In order to set the module and power data:
1 Touch the input box beside Module field.
The virtual keyboard is displayed.
2 Enter the number of the module field and confirm with OK.
3 Touch the input box beside Module power.
The virtual keyboard is displayed.
4 Enter the desired module power and confirm with OK.
5 Touch the input box beside Name.
The virtual keyboard is displayed.
6 Enter the name of the string and confirm with OK.
7 Touch Save and then Next to go to the next dialog.
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Configuring the inverter data (Basic / Inverter)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 331 of 374
Configuring the monitoring
Note
When configuring through the touchscreen, the "Monitoring" sub dialog does
not apply for power meters. Power meters in inverter mode can be configured
from the PC (Page 241).
Defining faults
Dialog boxes
Active, Inactive
Monitoring can be activated for the desired period, or deactivated
completely.
Period of time unshadowed, Monitoring starts at min. power
Combined conditions for fault definition:
Monitoring is based on continuous comparison of the power from all
inverters, including individual trackers in the case of inverters with more
than one tracker.
If an individual module loses power, the string power for the same level of
irradiation will drop, and can thus be detected and reported.
Power comparison always works reliably even if the weather is cloudy. The
important thing is that the modules should not be in the shade during the
set period. Therefore, the monitoring period should be scheduled for
periods when there are no shadows.
As power measurement in the inverter is very inaccurate under a certain
threshold, you can also specify a minimum percentage value (Monitoring
starts at minimum power) below which monitoring is interrupted.
Permanent snow covering possible
False messages may occur if the unit is covered in snow. These are
messages from the power comparison that occur as a result of partial
covering, or failure messages if the inverter is no longer switched on at all
because it is completely covered by snow.
There are two ways to minimize this problem:
– The minimum percentage value above which power monitoring starts
should be set as high as possible, e.g. 30%. For example, if the
generator power is 4500 Wp, power monitoring will start only at 1350
watts. The partly shaded modules reduce the power from the unshaded
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Configuring the inverter data (Basic / Inverter)
332 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
modules so that the required 1350 watts is hardly ever or never
reached. This is how the problem of partial covering is resolved.
– Failure messages are always sent when the inverter is not working or
not online at times that have been configured as unshaded. It is then
assumed that there is a fault. Complete snow covering would therefore
be reported as a failure. To solve this problem, there is a check box for
Permanent snow covering. If this is set to Yes no failure message is
set if all inverters are offline. This option also depends on the current
date. It is not taken into account in the period from the start of
November to the end of April. Outside of this period, it is automatically
disabled. Monitoring then works as usual and also reports complete
failures of all inverters.
Procedure
To set monitoring:
1 Touch Active.
2 Touch the input boxes beside Unshadowed from and to.
The virtual keyboard is displayed.
3 Enter the desired period and confirm with OK.
4 Touch the input box for Monitoring from minimum power.
The virtual keyboard is displayed.
5 Enter the lower limit percentage of generator power at which monitoring is
to start, and confirm with OK.
6 Where necessary, enable Permanent snow cover possible.
7 Touch Save and then Next to go to the next dialog.
Configuring Messages
Dialog boxes
Message via
Alarm messages from the power monitoring can be sent by E-mail, Text
message (SMS) and/or Relay.
Starting from a deviation of
If the target power deviates from the actual power by more than a certain
tolerance, a message can be sent by e-mail or text message (SMS), or
through a relay, after the selected fault duration.
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Configuring the inverter data (Basic / Inverter)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 333 of 374
Starting from malfunction duration of
This indicates how long a fault should be present continuously, before it is
recognized as a fault. The minimum fault duration is 5 minutes, but a
longer one should be selected.
Max. number of messages per day
So that malfunctions are not reported too often, a maximum number of
messages per day can be defined.
Procedure
To configure the limit values for fault messages, and the messaging in
general:
1 Select the message form (Relay, E-Mail and/or SMS) .
2 Touch the input box beside From deviation of.
The virtual keyboard is displayed.
3 Enter the lower limit percentage of generator power at which a fault is
recognized, and confirm with OK.
4 Touch the input box beside Starting from ? of malfunction.
The virtual keyboard is displayed.
5 Enter the lower limit percentage of the fault duration at which a fault is
recognized, and confirm with OK.
6 Touch the input box for Max. number of messages per day.
The virtual keyboard is displayed.
7 Enter the maximum number of messages to be sent per day and confirm
with OK.
8 Touch Save and then Next to go to the next dialog.
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Configuring the inverter data (Basic / Inverter)
334 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Configuring the graph display
If configuring through the display, only the Y-axis (power output) of the graph
for the yield data can be set; if configuring from a PC, both the Y-axis (Page
242) and the X-axis (time of day) can be (Page 245).
Nothing usually has to be changed here, as Solar Log1000
automatically
calculates the values for the generator power input. However, these values
can be adapted to your own data.
Dialog boxes
Day, Month, Year, All Years
For each period specified, the maximum value to be plotted can be entered
in kW (in W for a day).
The graph on the display and at the PC represents these values on the Y
axis.
Changes become effective when a new graph is displayed, or after a
displayed graph is updated.
Procedure
To set the representation on the Y-axis:
1 Touch the required input box beside Day, Month, Year and/or All Years.
The virtual keyboard is displayed.
2 Enter the maximum value to be represented on the Y-axis and confirm with
OK.
3 Touch Save.
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Defining forecast data for the solar plant (Basic / Forecast)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 335 of 374
10.9 Defining forecast data for the solar plant (Basic / Forecast)
By setting forecast values for the yield data, you can check on the graph
whether the plant is reaching the desired annual yield or not.
To do this, a percentage rate is allocated to each month. This is deduced from
the yield statistics over the previous years.
Solar Log1000
always calculates the target value cumulatively, per day. This
means that, at the beginning of the month, it is not the total monthly target that
is set, but the target for days already passed, plus that of the current day.
In the forecast, Solar Log1000
also takes account of the yields in all previous
years, and in this way can allow for local weather events (in most cases, snow
in December). The yearly forecast is therefore usually fairly accurate by
September.
All the dialog boxes apply only to the inverters that have been selected.
To define the forecast data:
Select Config./Basic/Forecast from the menu.
A dialog box opens for defining the forecast data.
Defining inverter / plant groups and feed-in
Dialog boxes
Plant group
If plant groups are defined, forecast data can be defined here for a certain
plant group or for the whole plant.
Feed-in tariff
The feed-in compensation rate for the plant is entered here. The yield in
euro is calculated on the graph using this factor.
Yearly target
The annual target in kWh/kWp is entered here for the inverter or for the
plant group. The yield in the selected currency is calculated on the graph
using this factor.
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Defining forecast data for the solar plant (Basic / Forecast)
336 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Procedure
To configure the feed-in tariff and yearly target:
1 Touch the button Plant group.
A list of inverters is displayed, or plant groups if these have been
defined.
2 Select the desired yield, and touch Back to continue.
3 Touch the input box beside Feed-in tariff.
The virtual keyboard is displayed.
4 Enter the applicable feed-in tariff (for example, in cents) and confirm with
OK.
5 Touch the input box beside Yearly target.
The virtual keyboard is displayed.
6 Enter the forecast value in kWh/kWp and confirm with OK.
7 Touch Save and then Next to go to the next dialog.
Setting monthly values for Target / Actual calculation
Dialog boxes
Jan to Dec
Enter the monthly percentage of the annual target here. The monthly
values can be adapted to suit the local conditions.
Procedure
1 Touch the input box beside the month concerned.
The virtual keyboard is displayed.
The monthly percentages must add up to 100% of the yearly target.
2 Enter the monthly percentage of the yearly target and confirm with OK.
3 Touch Save.
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Plant information for the homepage (Internet / Basic settings)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 337 of 374
10.10 Plant information for the homepage (Internet / Basic settings)
So that the Solar-Log1000
can send data (e.g. backup data) over the Internet
and/or yield data to be displayed on the homepage, it must be connected to
an Internet router and network configuration must be completed.
To configure the plant information for the homepage:
Select Config./Internet/Basic settings from the menu.
A dialog box opens for defining the forecast data.
Configuring the Internet portal
First, the type of Solar Log™ homepage has to be defined.
To set up and prepare a homepage, please also refer to the "Homepage"
section, Page 370.
Dialog boxes
Full Service, Classic-2nd
Edition, Self MadeClassic-1st
Edition
Option fields to activate the homepage type.
Procedure
1 Touch the option box for the desired homepage (Full Service, Classic-2nd
Edition, Self Made or Classic-1st
Edition).
2 Touch Save and then Next to go to the next dialog.
The next dialogs vary according to the type of homepage selected.
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Plant information for the homepage (Internet / Basic settings)
338 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Configuring "Full Service" and "Classic 1st Edition"
For this type of homepage, only basic user data is required:
Dialog boxes
Server, User name, Password
These details are provided in the registration documents after you have
registered for the corresponding service.
Procedure
1 Touch the input box beside each log on field.
The virtual keyboard is displayed.
2 Enter the log on details that were provided for you and confirm with OK.
3 Touch Save.
Configuring "Classic 2nd Edition" and "Self Made"
For these types of homepage, the basic user data is entered for the FTP
server and the e-mail address:
Dialog boxes
FTP Server, User name, Password
These details are provided in the registration documents after you have
registered for the corresponding service. If you are working with your own
Self Made homepage, enter the details of your own server here.
Procedure
1 Touch the input box beside each log on field.
The virtual keyboard is displayed.
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Configuring e-mail and text messages (SMS) (Internet / Email / SMS)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 339 of 374
2 Enter the log on details and confirm with OK.
3 Touch Save and then Next to go to the next dialog.
Dialog boxes
SMTP Server, User name, Password
These details were provided when you registered for the e-mail service.
Procedure
1 Touch the input box beside each log on field.
The virtual keyboard is displayed.
2 Enter the log on details that were sent to you and confirm with OK.
3 Touch Save.
10.11 Configuring e-mail and text messages (SMS) (Internet / Email / SMS)
Text messages (SMS) are sent in two stages. First, an e-mail message is sent
to an e-mail service provider who provides the text message (SMS) service.
From a keyword on the Subject line, this provider detects that the message is
to be forwarded as a text message (SMS) to a certain number. For the
incoming e-mails, some e-mail providers forward a text message (SMS) free
of charge with the Subject line for information.
Alternatively, text messages (SMS) can also be sent and billed directly
through the SIM card (Page 319).
To configure e-mail and text messages (SMS):
Select Config./Internet/E-mail/SMS from the menu.
A dialog box opens for defining the e-mail and text messages (SMS).
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Configuring e-mail and text messages (SMS) (Internet / Email / SMS)
340 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Activating / deactivating e-mail / text messages (SMS)
The basic address settings are entered in this dialog box; the message
destinations and sending times are defined in the next dialog.
Dialog boxes
E-mail active
Check box to enable or disable e-mail messages.
E-mail addr. 1
Here you enter the e-mail address of the recipient to which e-mail
messages are to be sent.
E-mail addr. 2
Here you enter an additional e-mail for another recipient to which e-mail
messages are to be sent.
SMS active
Check box to enable or disable text messages (SMS).
Mobile No.
Enter the mobile phone number of the recipient to which text messages
(SMS) are to be sent.
Procedure
1 Select the required type of notification (E-mail active and/or SMS active).
2 Touch the required input box beside E-mail addr. 1, E-mail addr. 2 and/or
Mobile No..
The virtual keyboard is displayed.
3 Enter the e-mail address or mobile phone number of the recipient and
confirm with OK.
4 Touch Save and then Next to go to the next dialog.
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Configuring e-mail and text messages (SMS) (Internet / Email / SMS)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 341 of 374
Setting a sending time for the yield data
Dialog boxes
By e-mail
At the selected sending time, an e-mail message with the current yield data
is sent to the e-mail address(es) entered in the previous dialog box.
By SMS
At the selected sending time, a text message (SMS) with the current yield
data is sent to the mobile phone number(s) entered in the previous dialog
box.
Sending time
Here you set a sending time for the e-mail(s) and/or text messages (SMS).
Set a time when you are sure that the PV plant will be offline, even in
summer, e.g. after 22:30 (10:30 pm).
Procedure
1 Select the required type of notification (by e-mail and/or by SMS).
2 Touch the input box beside Send time.
The virtual keyboard is displayed.
3 Enter the desired sending time and confirm with OK.
4 Touch Save and then Next to go to the next dialog.
Testing the connection
This dialog can be used to test the settings for text messages (SMS) and e-
mail by making a test transmission.
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Configuring e-mail and text messages (SMS) (Internet / Email / SMS)
342 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Dialog boxes
Test e-mail, Test SMS
These buttons are used to start the test transmissions.
Last transmission
Display field: Time of last transfer.
Status
Display field: Status of last transfer (Page 362)
Procedure
1 Touch the button beside desired test.
An information window appears after the test, so that the status can
be checked on the display.
2 Touch Save if the test was successful, otherwise touch Back to check and
correct the connection data.
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Setting up automatic data exports (Internet / WEB)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 343 of 374
10.12 Setting up automatic data exports (Internet / WEB)
The automatic data export allows you to regularly transfer yield data to a
homepage, in order to present the system on the Internet along with its online
data. The data are transferred to the selected server (Page 337).
To set up and prepare a homepage, please also refer to the "Homepage"
section, Page 370.
To set up automatic data exports:
Select Config./Internet/WEB from the menu.
A dialog box opens for activating and setting the update interval.
Activating exports and setting the update interval
Dialog boxes
WEB activated
This check box is used to switch data exports on or off.
Update interval
The interval for data updates can be set by selecting one of the radio
buttons between 10 min and daily.
Procedure
1 Touch WEB activated.
2 Enable the desired Interval.
If not registered for flat-rate Internet, we recommend selecting the daily
option.
3 Touch Save and then Next to go to the next dialog.
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Configuring plant monitoring (Extended / Plant monitoring)
344 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Testing the connection
Dialog boxes
Start test transmission
This button is used to start the transmission test. If there is a transmission
error, the corresponding error code appears beside Status (Page 358).
Procedure
1 Touch Start test transmission.
An information window appears after the test, so that the status can
be checked on the display.
2 Touch Save if the test was successful, otherwise touch Back to check and
correct the connection data.
10.13 Configuring plant monitoring (Extended / Plant monitoring)
These settings can be used to select all the fault types that are to set off the
alarm function. We recommend setting these parameters as the final step in
the configuration.
To activate plant monitoring:
Select Config./Advanced/Plant monitoring from the menu.
The system monitoring dialog box is opened
Dialog boxes
Close relay
The potential-free contact (relay) in Solar Log1000
closes if there is a fault.
This function can be used, for example, to switch on an external alarm light
in order to have a rapid visual indication.
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Configuring the connection to the large display (Extended / Large display)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 345 of 374
Send e-mail
If there is a fault, an e-mail message is sent to the configured address.
Send SMS
If there is a fault, a text message (SMS) is sent to the configured mobile
phone number.
Switch on 'E' LED
If there is a fault, the "E" LED on Solar Log1000
starts flashing. This function
is useful if Solar Log1000
is being used without an Internet connection, and
the owner of the system would like to have a simple form of monitoring.
Procedure
1 Enable the desired options (see above list).
2 Touch Save.
10.14 Configuring the connection to the large display (Extended / Large display)
Large displays can be connected either through the RS485 bus (RS485/422
B, RS485 A interface) or through the S0 pulse output.
If the RS485 bus is already occupied by inverters, the large display can often
be connected in parallel. To do this, the baud rate of the display must match
the baud rate of the inverters using the bus.
Note
Always follow the instructions of the display manufacturer regarding the wiring
and any initial configuration that may be necessary.
To configure the connection to the large display:
Select Config./Advanced/Large display from the menu.
A dialog box opens for configuring the large display.
Dialog boxes
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Configuring the connection to the large display (Extended / Large display)
346 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
RS485-A, RS485-B, S0 output
These check boxes are used to activate the display on the corresponding
interface, and appear in the various dialog boxes that appear one after the
other in the dialog sequence.
On the right of the check box is a display field which indicates if and how
the interface is already assigned.
Schneider Displaytechnik, RiCo Electronic Design, HvG Hard &
Software Engineering
These 3 large displays are currently supported on the RS485/422 B and
RS485 A interfaces.
Plant group
Here you can select which plant group is to be shown on the large display.
If no groups are used, the whole plant is shown.
Procedure
1 Enable the check box for the interface connection and the option field for
the connected display.
2 Touch the button Plant group.
A selection list is displayed:
3 Select the plant group to be shown on the large display and touch Back to
continue.
4 Touch Save, then touch Next to go to the next dialog if you want to
configure other displays.
Note
If the display is being configured on the S0 output, a pulse factor has to be
entered (Page 204):
The pulse factor in Solar Log1000
must be the same as the pulse factor on the
large display.
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Configuring alarm messages and signals for the alarm contact (Extended / Alarm contact)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 347 of 374
10.15 Configuring alarm messages and signals for the alarm contact (Extended / Alarm contact)
The Solar Log1000
continuously monitors its internal alarm contact. If this
contact is opened, it sets off an alarm which can be indicated in various ways.
Note
Only set the alarm contact to active if you have connected an alarm
circuit to the alarm contact connection.
To configure alarm signals and messages for the alarm contact:
Select Config./Advanced/Alarm contact from the menu.
A dialog box opens for configuring the alarm contact.
Dialog boxes
Alarm contact active
This check box is used to switch the alarm function on or off.
Notifications in the event of an alarm
Alarms can be communicated by E-mail, Relay, the Error-LED on the
front panel, SMS and/or through the internal Speaker of Solar Log1000
. The
e-mail, SMS and relay settings must be already configured.
Procedure
1 Enable the desired options (see above list).
2 If required, you can test the alarm: Touch Test for 10 sec..
3 Touch Save.
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
RS485 wireless communications package: Testing the connection (Extended / RS485 wireless package)
348 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
10.16 RS485 wireless communications package: Testing the connection (Extended / RS485 wireless package)
This dialog box is used to test the wireless connection to the optional RS485
wireless communications package.
Note
The test function is only available with Solar Log1000
.
Before the connection test, the RS485 interface to be tested must be already
configured in the Config./Start/Initial configuration dialog box and the
wireless modules must be already set to the signaling speed of the inverters.
A red test adapter (loop back) is available for testing the wireless connection.
Note
For detailed instructions on how to install and set up the RS485 wireless
communications package, see the manual that accompanies the package.
To test the RS485 wireless connection:
Select Config./Advanced/RS485 wireless package from the menu.
A dialog box opens for testing the RS485 wireless package.
Dialog boxes
RS485-A
Display field which indicates the inverter to which the wireless package on
the RS485 A interface is assigned, or whether the connection is still free.
RS485-B
Display field which indicates the inverter to which the wireless package on
the RS485/422 B interface is assigned, or whether the connection is still
free.
Test
This button is used to start the transmission test.
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
External switches - smart metering (Extended / External switches)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 349 of 374
Procedure
1 Touch the Test button beside the desired interface.
2 Select a switch from the list.
A window displaying the connection quality appears:
Note
The wireless package is only working correctly if the test signal
reaches 100%.
3 Touch Back to close the test window.
10.17 External switches - smart metering (Extended / External switches)
Up to 4 external switches can be configured through a series of 4 dialog
boxes, for example relays or even network sockets for LAN connections.
To configure an external switch:
Select Config./Advanced/External switches from the menu.
A dialog box opens for selecting an external switch.
Dialog boxes
Please choose:
Button for selecting an external switch.
Procedure
1 Touch Please choose
A list of external switches is displayed for selection.
2 Select a device and touch Select to continue.
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Making data corrections (Internal / Data correction)
350 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
If no interface is assigned, select None.
If the selected device requires an IP address to be entered, this should be
indicated in the corresponding input box:
If it is displayed, touch the input box beside IP Address, enter the IP
address using the virtual keyboard and touch OK to confirm.
3 After each switch selection, touch Save and then Next to go to the next
dialog.
10.18 Making data corrections (Internal / Data correction)
This lets you adjust daily values for any of the previous days, or change daily
totals.
To make a data correction:
Select Config./Internal/Data correction from the menu.
The data correction dialog box opens:
Dialog boxes
Date
Enter the date for which the data are to be adjusted.
Day value
The day value must correspond to the power meter reading, i.e. the real
value for that day.
Procedure
1 For Date enter the desired date in the format "DD.MM.YY" using the virtual
keyboard and confirm with OK.
2 Enter the correction value for the day in kWh using the virtual keyboard
and confirm with OK.
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Configuring the system internal settings (Internal / System)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 351 of 374
The value must correspond to the power meter reading, i.e. the real value
for that day.
3 Touch Save.
10.19 Configuring the system internal settings (Internal / System)
The internal settings of the device can be configured through a series of dialog
boxes.
Setting the display brightness
Setting access protection for the menus
Displaying the serial and license number
Delete data
To configure the internal settings:
1 Select Config./Internal/System from the menu.
A dialog box opens for setting the brightness on the display.
2 Touch Next to jump to the desired dialog.
Setting the display brightness
Dialog boxes
Switch on at … hr, Switch off at … hr
The display brightness can be limited to a certain period. If the display is
touched, the screen lights up again.
Dim 50% after … min, Dim 100% after … min
The display brightness can be dimmed by 50% and/or 100% after a certain
period. If the display is touched, the screen lights up again completely.
Dialog slide show after … min
After the selected time, the display shows "Overview graph – Daily graph –
Monthly graph – Yearly graph – Overall graph – Large display graph" at 15
second intervals.
Procedure
1 Enable the desired options (see above list).
2 Touch the desired input boxes for Hour and Minute.
The virtual keyboard is displayed.
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Configuring the system internal settings (Internal / System)
352 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
3 Enter the desired times and confirm with OK.
4 Touch Save and then Next to go to the next dialog if required.
Setting access protection for the menus
Access to the menu items can be protected by a PIN code (up to 8 digits). The
protected menu can be accessed from the initial screen (or menu items from
an unprotected menu) only after the correct PIN code is entered when asked
for.
Dialog boxes
Pin Code, Repeat
These input boxes are used to enter and confirm a PIN code to block
access to the selected menu items.
Diagnosis, Configuration, USB
Access to all or some of these menus can be protected by the PIN code.
Procedure
1 Tick all the menus which are to have access protection.
2 Touch the input box for Pin Code.
The virtual keyboard is displayed.
3 Enter the PIN code (up to 8 digits) and confirm with OK.
4 To confirm the PIN code, touch Repeat.
The virtual keyboard is displayed.
5 Enter the PIN code (up to 8 digits) and confirm with OK.
6 Touch Save and then Next to go to the next dialog if required.
Note
If there was an error in the PIN code confirmation (in the Repeat box), an
error message is displayed when exiting this dialog box and the PIN code
remains unchanged.
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Configuring the system internal settings (Internal / System)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 353 of 374
Displaying the serial and license number
Dialog boxes
Serial number, license key
Display fields: These show the Solar Log™ serial number and license key
if applicable. These values cannot be changed.
Delete data
Note
Before carrying out any of the following delete options, we recommend making
a data backup either at the PC (Page 257) or on a USB stick at the device
(see user manual), so that the data can be restored if necessary.
Dialog boxes
Initialize yield data
This button deletes all the yield data.
Initialize inverter configuration
This button deletes all inverter configuration data.
Restore factory settings
Restoring the factory settings is necessary if Solar Log1000
is to be used in
another system or if a faulty configuration is to be deleted. All settings
made on the unit are lost, as well as all data collected during run-time
(Page 363).
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Updating firmware automatically or manually (Internal / Firmware)
354 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Procedure
1 Touch the desired delete option (see above list).
You are prompted for confirmation, with a warning that all data will be
lost:
2 To delete all the data touch Yes - Save,
to cancel the delete operation, touch No - Cancel.
If the delete is confirmed, the device is restarted.
10.20 Updating firmware automatically or manually (Internal / Firmware)
To download firmware updates, the Solar Log1000
must be connected to the
Internet.
Before every firmware update, please make a data backup.
To configure the settings for firmware updates:
Select Config./Internal/Firmware from the menu.
A dialog box opens for configuring the firmware updates.
Dialog boxes
Automatic update from the Internet
If this option is enabled, Solar Log1000
is updated automatically, if new
firmware is available from Solare Datensysteme GmbH. To complete the
update, Solar Log1000
restarts after downloading the firmware.
Also by analog and GPRS modem
If this option is enabled, the firmware is also updated automatically through
the modem connection. If you wish to avoid the higher connection costs,
leave this option switched off.
Current firmware
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Selecting a display language (System / Language settings)
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 355 of 374
Display field: For information, this field shows the firmware version
currently installed on the device, along with the firmware date.
Check for new firmware now
Use this button to search for new firmware immediately.
Procedure
1 Touch the desired delete option(s) (see above list).
2 Touch Save.
3 To start searching for firmware updates immediately, touch
Check for new firmware now.
A status window opens.
If a new firmware version is found, the corresponding information is
displayed, and the firmware is downloaded and installed automatically; the
device is then restarted.
Note
After restarting, installation of the firmware can take up to 15 minutes to
complete. Do not switch off the device during this time!
10.21 Selecting a display language (System / Language settings)
The selected display language applies both to the display and the web
browser.
To set the display language:
1 Select Config./Internal/Language settings from the menu.
A dialog box opens for setting the display language.
2 Touch the desired language.
Solar Log1000: Configuration at the unit
Country settings (Internal / Country setting)
356 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Solar Log1000
changes back to the initial screen, which is now
displayed in the selected language.
10.22 Country settings (Internal / Country setting)
The country settings set the currency, date format and time format
(independently of the language setting).
To configure the country settings:
1 Select Config./Internal/Country settings from the menu.
A list of countries is displayed for selection:
2 Select the desired country
3 Touch Select to save the country setting.
Faults
Fault indications on the device LEDs
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 357 of 374
11 Faults
11.1 Fault indications on the device LEDs
System malfunctions
LED 1 LED 2 LED E Meaning and possible remedy
quickly quickly off For 5 min. during initialization: Error!
Pull out power plug and plug in
again.
illuminate
d
slow slow Failed to read the time from the Internet:
Set time manually
Check Internet access
off slow slow Configuration invalid or not readable:
Check interface
Check cable
Restore factory settings;
Page 364
lit Only for Fronius-inverters:
No data communication!
Wait for inverter feed-in
Check wiring
Check that power is present at the
interface converter
quickly System has signaled a fault.
Fault message
Solar Log1000
: Check on the
touchscreen in the
"Diagnosis/messages" dialog
blinking When a I/O Box is installed with analog set
points, this blinking indicates an invalid or
missing input signal.
If the P LED is blinking, this indicates that the inverter is being controlled (power
reduction) by the feed-in power management.
Faults
Fault messages
358 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
11.2 Fault messages
Status codes for export test transmission
Err.
no.
Message Meaning Remedy
Error when setting up the test connection or logging onto the server
101 DNS error
Type of Internet access
set to "None".
An DNS server must be
entered.
There is no connection
to the network.
Set correct access type.
Enter correct DNS.
Check cables and
plugs.
102 Cannot open socket. Internal error Prepare configuration
and data backup
and contact Support
103 Cannot connect
socket
The connection is
disrupted by a firewall.
The server is
overloaded.
Set appropriate
approvals in the
firewall.
Try again later.
104 No answer from the
server.
There is a fault on the
FTP server.
Try again later.
Restart the FTP server.
105 Wrong response from
the server.
The FTP server used is
not supported
or is not configured
correctly.
Use another FTP server
or
Configuration
106 User / password
incorrect.
The user name of
password to
access the FTP was
entered incorrectly.
Check spelling.
107 Wrong directory. An incorrect directory
was set for the
transmission.
Check spelling.
Error when transferring the backup.
108 Unable to send the
file
Error when transferring data without losing the test connection.
111 Error in remote file
name
This is an internal error. Contact support.
112 Error when setting the
representation type.
The FTP server used is
not supported or not
configured properly.
Use another FTP server
or check the
configuration.
Faults
Fault messages
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 359 of 374
Err.
no.
Message Meaning Remedy
113 Error when setting the
passive mode.
The FTP server used is
not supported or not
configured properly.
The connection is
disrupted by a firewall.
The Internet connection
has been disrupted.
Use another FTP server
or
Configuration
Set appropriate
approvals in the
firewall.
Check the Internet
connection.
114 Socket could not be
opened.
Internal error Prepare configuration
and data backup
and contact Support
115 IP address could not
be changed.
Internal error Contact support.
116 Socket could not be
connected.
The connection is
disrupted by a firewall.
The server is
overloaded.
Set appropriate
approvals in the
firewall.
Try again later.
117 Unknown error
118 STOR failed. There is a fault on the
FTP server.
Try again later.
Restart the server.
Check free memory
space on the server.
119 File could not be
opened.
Internal error Contact support.
120 Time exceeded, no
answer
The server is
overloaded.
The connection is
disrupted by a firewall.
Try again later.
Set appropriate
approvals in the
firewall.
121 Time exceeded,
transmission error
The server is
overloaded.
The Internet connection
has been disrupted.
Try again later.
Check the Internet
connection.
122 No answer
123 Transmission failed. There is a fault on the
FTP server.
Try again later.
Restart the server.
Check free memory
space on the server.
124 Incorrect number of
bytes transferred.
The server is
overloaded.
The Internet connection
has been disrupted.
Try again later.
Check the Internet
connection.
Faults
Fault messages
360 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Err.
no.
Message Meaning Remedy
Error when transferring data and test connection lost.
The probable cause is the loss of the test connection. This can occur when the
Internet connection is disrupted or when the maximum FTP connection length is
exceeded.
131 Error in remote file
name
This is an internal error. Contact support.
132 Error when setting the
representation type.
The FTP server used is
not supported or not
configured properly.
Use another FTP server
or check the
configuration.
133 Error when setting the
passive mode.
The FTP server used is
not supported or not
configured properly.
The connection is
disrupted by a firewall.
The Internet connection
has been disrupted.
Use another FTP server
or
Configuration
Set appropriate
approvals in the
firewall.
Check the Internet
connection.
134 Socket could not be
opened.
Internal error Prepare configuration
and data backup
and contact Support
135 IP address could not
be changed.
Internal error Contact support.
136 Socket could not be
connected.
The connection is
disrupted by a firewall.
The server is
overloaded.
Set appropriate
approvals in the
firewall.
Try again later.
137 Unknown error
138 STOR failed. There is a fault on the
FTP server.
Try again later.
Restart the server.
Check free memory
space on the server.
139 File could not be
opened.
Internal error Contact support.
140 Time exceeded, no
answer
The server is
overloaded.
The connection is
disrupted by a firewall.
Try again later.
Set appropriate
approvals in the
firewall.
141 Time exceeded,
transmission error
The server is
overloaded.
The Internet connection
has been disrupted.
Try again later.
Check the Internet
connection.
142 No answer
Faults
Fault messages
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 361 of 374
Err.
no.
Message Meaning Remedy
143 Transmission error There is a fault on the
FTP server.
Try again later.
Restart the server.
Check free memory
space on the server.
144 Incorrect number of
bytes transferred.
The server is
overloaded.
The Internet connection
has been disrupted.
Try again later.
Check the Internet
connection.
Fault on the server
150 Error when renaming
the remote file
Simultaneous access
attempt
Terminate other
connections to the FTP
server.
199 Last transmission
attempt failed but no
known error.
Internal error Contact support.
Error when preparing the data in the internal memory.
200 Error when creating
files
Internal error Contact support.
Faults
Inverter fault messages
362 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
E-mail transmission status codes
Err.
No.
Message Meaning Remedy
1 Unable to resolve IP
address of SMTP
server
Type of Internet access
set to "None".
An DNS server must be
entered.
There is no connection
to the network.
Set correct access type.
Enter correct DNS.
Check cables and plugs.
2 User name or
password incorrect, or
not accepted
Check spelling
3 SMTP server not
responding
The connection is
disrupted by a firewall.
The server is
overloaded.
Set appropriate
approvals in the firewall.
Try again later.
Prepare configuration
and data backup
and contact Support
98 Previous transmission
failed
The Solar LogTM
could
not send older e-mails.
Carry out a test e-mail
dispatch and analyse the
error message
displayed.
99 Unknown error Internal error Contact support.
11.3 Inverter fault messages
Solar Log™ sends three types of fault message
Inverter status and fault messages
Inverter failure messages
Messages concerning fall in output from individual inverters or strings
(for multi-string inverters)
Faults
Restarting and resetting
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 363 of 374
11.4 Restarting and resetting
A restart is necessary if Solar Log™ is no longer responding to inputs from
control buttons or from the PC.
All settings made on the unit are maintained, as well as all data collected
during run-time.
Note
If the IP address is changed, Solar Log™restarts automatically when the new
address is saved.
Restoring the factory settings is necessary if Solar Log™ is to be used on
another system or if a an incorrect configuration is being deleted.
All settings made on the unit are lost, as well as all data collected during run-
time. It is therefore advisable to back up the data before resetting; Page 286.
Status after restoring factory settings
Time Retained
IP address Retained
Passwords Deleted
Configuration data Deleted
Yield date Deleted
Reset buttons
Effects of reset button:
Device is restarted (reset)
Factory settings are restored
The reset button is located on the top of the housing.
If the cover is in place, it must be removed to allow access to the reset button;
Figure 14:
Pull the cover forward to remove.
Figure 14 : Reset buttons
Restarting
Press the reset button for a long period, e.g. with a straightened paper clip
LED 1 goes out to confirm that the reset button has been pressed.
After about 5 seconds, LED 1 is lit again.
Faults
Restarting and resetting
364 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
If the button is released at this point, the Solar-Log™ restarts.
Under no circumstances should the power plug simply be disconnected.
Do not restart by pulling out the power plug!
Restoring the factory settings
Press and hold the reset button, e.g. with the tip of a pen.
LED 1 goes out to confirm that the reset button has been pressed.
After about 5 seconds, LED 1 is lit again.
After about 20 seconds, LED 1 and LED 2 start to flash and the device
is initialized (LEDs, Page 217).
Release the reset button.
After the reset button is released, it is still possible to stop the reset to factory
settings:
Press the reset button again within the first 5 seconds of the
initialization phase.
Disposal
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 365 of 374
12 Disposal
Caution
Solar-Log™ contains electronic components that can release highly toxic substances if
burned or disposed of along with domestic waste.
Make sure you dispose of the Solar LogTM
as electronic scrap in the
recycling center.
Technical Data
366 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
13 Technical Data
Solar Log200
Solar Log500
Solar Log1000
Inverter communication
max. number of inverters 1 10 100
Communication interface 1 × RS485/RS422 1 × RS485/RS422 1 × RS485,
1 × RS485/RS422
Mixed inverter operation - - +
recommended max. plant
size
15 kWp 50 kWp 1 MWp
max. cable length max. 600 m1 600 m max. 600 m max.
integrated WLAN
(Solar Log™ WiFi)
+ + +
Bluetooth
(Solar Log™ BT)
optional,
int. antenna
optional,
int. antenna
optional,
int. antenna
GPRS
(Solar Log1000
GPRS)
- - optional,
external antenna
Power Management
(Solar Log1000
PM+)
- - +
SCB connection - - +
Plant monitoring
String monitoring
(depending on inverter
type)
+ + +
Inverter failure + + +
Power monitoring per
inverter
- + +
Status and fault monitoring + + +
Sensor system connection
(irradiation/2 × temp./
wind)
- - +
Digital power meter
connection (S0 in)
+ + +
Email and text message
(SMS) alert
+ + +
Local alarm (potential-free
contact)
- - +
Yield forecast + + +
Degradation calculation + + +
1 Depending on the cable used. Use shielded data cable.
Technical Data
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 367 of 374
Solar Log200
Solar Log500
Solar Log1000
Visualization
Integrated web server + + +
Graphic display -
local PC
+ + +
Graphic display -
USB
- - +
Graphic display - Internet + + +
LED status display + + +
Display on the unit - 2 line
matrix display
Graphic display
Controls on the unit - Keypad Touchscreen
Large display
RS485/S0-out
- / - + / + + / +
Interfaces
Ethernet network + + +
USB interface - - +
Analog / GPRS (GSM)
modem
- - +
Potential-free contact
(relay)
- - +
Alarm contact - - +
General Data
Input / Output voltage 220 V / 12 V
Power consumption 3 W
Ambient temperature -10 °C to +50 °C
Housing / dimensions
(W × D × H) in cm Plastic / 2.5 × 4 × 28.5
Mounting Wall mounted
Protection class IP 20 (indoor use only)
Connection to
Solar Log™ WEB
+ + +
Multiple languages DE, EN, ES, FR, IT, NL, DK
Memory, Micro SD card,
2 GB, endless data
logging
+ + +
Warranty 5 years
S0 interface
Umax 27 V DC
Imax 27mA DC
Standard DIN EN 43864
Appendix
368 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Appendix
Internet ports
If the Solar Log™ is connected to the Internet via a router, you must ensure that the following
ports on the router have been unblocked for the Solar Log™:
Port 21 TCP FTP data transfer (passive mode)
Port 25 TCP SMTP sending e-mail
Port 53 UDP/TCP DNS name resolution (separate DNS possible)
Port 80 TCP HTTP Web server
Port 123 UDP NTP Time server
SMA mixed wiring
Figure 15: SMA mixed wiring
Appendix
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 369 of 374
Interconnection of Kaco Powador inverters
Figure 16: Interconnection of Kaco Powador inverters
Instructions for Powador 6400xi and 8000xi
Interconnection of Powador 6400Xi and 8000xi:
Set 1 inverter as "Master", 2 as "Slaves";
Read the labeling on the inverter circuit board!
Clamp the Solar Log™ data cable to the "LOGGER" terminal strip on the
Master inverter
Also connect the inverters to each other through the "SYM" terminal strip
Connect any additional inverters through the "Logger" terminal strip
On the inverter operating display:
Set the communication addresses, numbering consecutively
On the inverter operating display: Switch "SYM Bus" to active
Powador 6400Xi and 8000xi stand-alone mode:
Set the inverter to "Slave", irrespective of labeling on the circuit board
Clamp the Solar Log™ data cable to the "SYM Bus" terminal strip
On the inverter operating display: Switch "SYM Bus" to
inactive
On the inverter operating display:
Set the communication addresses, numbering consecutively
Appendix
370 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
Homepage Service
Solar Log™ lets you store system data on the Internet. This means that it can
be queried through any Internet connection, and also allows you to make a
presentation of the system for friends and anyone else interested in solar
systems.
Solar Log™ WEB "Commercial Edition"
For private system owners who would like to have an installer assist with the
monitoring and maintenance of the system. In addition to the basic functions,
there are many extended functions available e.g. remote configuration of Solar
Log™, central monitoring of fault messages from multiple systems through a
simple traffic light indicators or by sending fault messages by text message
(SMS).
Up to four e-mail addresses can be set up for sending yield and fault
messages.
Monitoring solutions are also offered when a maintenance contract is signed.
Registration for Solar Log™ WEB "Full Service" is provided only by the
installer.
The other services such as maintenance and remote configuration are
included with the Full Service option.
Solar Log™ WEB "Full Service"
Anyone wishing to monitor their own system will find here all the basic
functions necessary for monitoring over the Internet, including an event log
and daily yield and fault messages to an e-mail address free of charge.
This new offer is intended for technically proficient operators and allows data
and older records to be imported from "Classic 1st Edition".
The service is free of charge up to a system size of 30 kWp, but a charge is
made for systems above 30 kWp. The first month is free.
Solar Log™ WEB "Self Made"
The no-cost solution for private system owners who are able to create and set
up their own homepage. It provides the most important basic functions such
as a clear event log, overview of yield per kWp installed or calculation and
display of the amount of C02 emissions avoided. It also allows power output
comparison between individual inverters and strings, as well as connection to
Solar-Log™ MOBILE for iPhones.
To use this, you will need to have a homepage available. Internet service
providers usually provide a homepage free of charge.
The following is a summary of the things you will need in order to be able to
set up a Solar Log™ Self Made homepage:
A homepage
It must be possible to write to the homepage by FTP protocol
The Solar Log™ Homepage kit
Configuration on Solar Log™ (export)
Notification by text message (SMS) is also possible in the event of problems in
the system. You will find a detailed description of our Self Made solution on
our homepage.
Solar Log™ WEB "Classic 1st Edition"
Appendix
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 371 of 374
For operators of existing systems and users of our previous Internet software,
we will continue to provide the familiar Solar Log™ "Home Edition" until further
notice.
Automatic notification by e-mail and text message (SMS)
An important feature of Solar Log™ is the automatic messages that can be
sent by e-mail or text message (SMS).
The following messages are available:
Inverter failure message
Power monitoring fault message
Status / fault code monitoring message
Alarm message due to alarm contact
Yield overview
The text content appears differently depending on whether the message is in
e-mail or text message (SMS) format.
List of figures
372 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
List of figures
Figure 1: Solar Log™ wall mounting .................................................................................. 10
Figure 2: Connections to the bottom side of Solar Log200, 500
............................................. 12
Figure 3: S0 connection on the top of theSolar Log500
....................................................... 12
Figure 4: Bottom Connections Solar Log1000
...................................................................... 13
Figure 5: Connections to the top of the Solar Log1000
......................................................... 13
Figure 6: Insertion slot for SIM card inside on the right (Solar Log1000
GPRS) ................... 14
Figure 7: Antenna connection on the top of the unit (Solar Log1000
PM+ GPRS) ............... 14
Figure 8: 6 pin terminal block connector – for connecting the first inverter ......................... 17
Figure 9: Additional terminal block connectors (Solar Log1000
) ........................................... 17
Figure 10: Control board before and after installation of the piggyback ............................... 21
Figure 11: Piggyback - insert jumper .................................................................................... 22
Figure 12: LED status display ............................................................................................. 217
Figure 13: LED status display ............................................................................................. 219
Figure 14 : Reset buttons .................................................................................................... 363
Figure 15: SMA mixed wiring .............................................................................................. 368
Figure 16: Interconnection of Kaco Powador inverters ....................................................... 369
List of figures
Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation 373 of 374
Accessories 17
Connection top Fehler! Ungültige Textmarke in einem
Eintrag auf der Seite 12
Connections bottom Fehler! Ungültige Textmarke in einem
Eintrag auf der Seite 12
Display malfunction 218, 219
normal operation 218, 219
Factory settings 363 GPRS 224, 225 Information
Firmware 220
Number of Inverters 220
Plant size 220
Serial number 220
Javascript 220 LED
1, 2 219
E 218, 219
P 217, 219
Mixed mode 20 Mounting 10 Package contents 9 Piggyback
mixed mode 20
Powador 8000xi Instructions 369
Reset buttons 363 Restarting 363 Restoring the factory settings 364 RS422
only Solar Log1000 13
RS485/422 B connection assignments 15 System malfunctions
LEDs 357
Terminal block connectors 17
List of figures
374 of 374 Solar Log1000/500/200
Installation
The copyright of these instructions remains with the manufacturer. No part of
these instructions may be may be reproduced in any form or processed,
duplicated or distributed using electronic systems without the written consent
of Solare Datensysteme GmbH.
Non-compliance resulting in contradiction of the above-mentioned
specifications shall result in obligation to provide compensation for damages.
All brands and trademarks contained in this manual are the sole property of
the respective manufacturer, which we respect and recognize herewith.
Solare Datensysteme GmbH
Fuhrmannstraße 9
72351 Geislingen-Binsdorf
Germany
www.solar-log.com
Version: June 2013 – 3.9.5